JP2021016640A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided, comprising: lottery means for performing a lottery related to a win; symbol displaying means capable of performing a symbol variable display; and game state control means capable of controlling games in a time shortened state. The game machine can control games in the time shortened state till the number of times of symbol variable displays reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times. An upper limit number of times (time-shortened 100 times) to be controlled in the time shortened state when a lottery result is a win (a 4R time-shortened big win) and an upper limit number of times (time-shortened 100 times) to be controlled in the time shortened state when the lottery result is a failure (a support time-shortened A) are configured to be a same number of times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

A game machine, for example, a bullet game machine, performs a big hit lottery and a symbol variation display game when the ball enters the starting port, and various various lottery results are reflected in the symbol variation display game. The structure is such that a notice effect is displayed to entertain the game. In this type of gaming machine, it is known that when a jackpot is won, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state (for example, Patent Document 1 below).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-239986

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the time saving state does not occur unless the jackpot is passed, the degree of freedom in game playability and directability is narrow, and the game lacks in fun.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the fun of a game by providing a new winning type capable of shifting to a time saving state without going through a big hit.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning, and
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit.
It is configured so that the time saving state can be controlled depending on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss.
The upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of time saving given by the time saving big hit) and the upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is lost (support) It is the same as the time reduction performance given by the time reduction (4R time reduction big hit time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times) = support time reduction time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times by support time reduction A)),
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, the fun of the game can be improved.

It is an external view of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game board and the effect button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of the look-ahead notice production. This is a game flow used to explain the game content (usually, time saving, probability variation mode). It is a figure which shows the production example of the probability change mode according to the number of consecutive villas. It is a figure which shows the production example of the time saving mode according to the remaining time saving number of times. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the hold addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning random number determination table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the support time saving symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition which concerns on the winning type target lottery form (variant example 1 of the lottery form). It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table (the hit type target lottery form). It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table (the lottery form for hit type, lottery form for loss type). It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table (the lottery form for hit type). It is explanatory drawing which provides for the explanation of the winning type, and the game state transition which concerns on the lottery form for loss type (variant example 2 of the lottery form). It is a figure which shows the loss symbol table (the lottery form for loss type). It is a figure which shows the normal middle hit, support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery) in normal. It is a figure which shows the probability change middle hit, support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery) during probable change. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example A) of the probability variation middle hit / support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example A) of the loss variation pattern distribution table during probability variation of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example B) of the probability variation middle hit / support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example B) of the loss variation pattern distribution table during probability variation of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows the time saving middle hit / support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for loss type) in normal. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number table. It is a timing chart which shows the decorative pattern effect which concerns on a normal variation 13s. This is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative pattern effect differs depending on the effect to be executed. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which has a different variation time. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which has a different variation time. It is a reference figure for comparing the decorative pattern effect shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed, and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed, and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a ball game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “game machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 that supports transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of the ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is composed of a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button 75d, and is composed of up, down, left, and right. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be input and operated in a direction is provided. The effect button 13 and the direction key 75 function as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, "player participation type effect" described later). ), The reception of operation input is enabled, and if a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the production may change before and after the operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means allow the player to set his / her favorite game on the "game setting screen" related to the waiting for customers (during the "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demo display)" described later). It is also used when doing. The game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen on which the player can set a game such as a desired volume and light intensity. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside the effect button 13, and the operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation are performed depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b. It is possible to notify the reception invalid period (for example, when the light is off).

A launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. As the launching device 32, a device having a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute is adopted.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, in a suitable place of the game machine, for example, a decorative lamp 45 (for directing) that exerts a light effect by decorating light inside a decorative member around the front frame of the glass door 6 and a center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs) are provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. Various effects including the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the three decorative symbols (see, for example, FIG. 5A) of the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an outer periphery of the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is on the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and on the lower side. Special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time reduction function in operation (during time reduction), and This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions of state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass (flow) through the right flow path 3c by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED, or the game ball is on the left. Notifies whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow) through the flow path 3b is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is in the lit state, it is advantageous to hit right, and if it is off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration body 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of the devices to detect the passage of a game ball. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that is difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), which is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, four general winning openings 43 (43a to 43d) on the left side and one (43e) on the right side are arranged, for a total of five, and a game is provided inside each of them. A general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning openings 43a to 43e) for detecting the passage of the ball is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. Has been done. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the recessed open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the grand prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 that bulges from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game area above the large winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surface of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on this, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 If is open (the big winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball aims to pass the right flow path 3c), the upper start port 34 side The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and general winning ports 43a to 43d on the left side, and winning means belonging to the right flow flow path 3c includes an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. If the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port is open), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and a prize is awarded from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 actually flows down to the right. It can be said that it is a winning means that belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is "right-handed" aiming to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, when the "state with electric support (electric support state)" described later occurs, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal game state). Therefore, under this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming the game ball to pass the left flow path 3b, "right" aiming the game ball to pass the right flow path 3c. "Strike" is considered to be advantageous. On the other hand, in the case of "no electric support (during non-electric support)" described later, on the contrary, the game ball is on the left instead of "right-handed" aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. "Left-handed" aiming to pass through the flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous. That is, the game progress is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c the game ball is caused to flow down according to the game state. Details will be described later, but there are "time saving state" and "probability change state" in the game state with electric support, and "normal state" and "latent state" in the game state with no electric support. ..

Each of the above-mentioned upper start opening 34, lower start opening 35, normal symbol start opening 37, large winning opening 50, or general winning opening 43a to 43e functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. Further, detection of an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a, or a general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning opening 43a to 43e). The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, the upper start opening 34 is 3, the lower start opening 35 is 1, the normal symbol start opening 37 is 0 (without a prize ball), the large winning opening 50 is 15, and the general winning openings 43a to e are 3 pieces. Will be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing type gate (for example, a normal symbol starting port 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decorative body 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 includes a clock face portion 81 composed of a number display unit in which numbers from the Roman letters "I" to "XII" are assigned and divided into 12 number sectors, and a clock board portion 81 on the clock face portion 81. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a minute hand and a minute hand formed so as to be rotatable, and forms a "wall clock portion" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock-type accessory". The clock face portion 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of the full-color LED, and each number sector is independently and independently of a different color. It has a structure that can emit light.

Further, in the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is further arranged around the outer side of the corolla to double the corolla, thereby forming a flower shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of the arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. The flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the center of the flower. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the arm 92 Tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped portion 91 covers the liquid crystal screen (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2). Then, when the flower-shaped portion 91 is moved to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip portion of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petal portion can be illuminated beautifully by a lamp or a full-color LED from behind. .. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the effect position of the broken line to the origin position of the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can have a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion, and the arm 92 has a predetermined tilting motion in addition to the fully open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilt motion that tilts to a tilt angle, a vibration motion in which the arm rattles, and a sizing motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice production depending on the operation mode, and setting suggestions described later. It is also used when performing (appearing) the production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control (game operation control) related to overall game operation. The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution (appearance) of the effect by the effect means. ), A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power supply (including a backup power supply) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that demonstrates interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition functions such as timer interrupts, reset circuit that can detect power on / off or power failure, output system reset signal, and reset CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range, hardware within a certain range It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start a backup process prior to power interruption. The game operation before the power is cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this game machine 1, it is possible to hold each storage content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43h for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected. The main control unit 20 receives the detection signals from these sensors and grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the game machine through the out port 49 and each winning port, and can receive the detection signal. It has become. The main control unit 20 includes an out-ball counting means for counting the number of out-balls based on a detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls is one of the "game performance information" defined by a specific value. For example, if "Today's cumulative number of out balls is 30,000", the operation information that the game machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today ("Cumulative number of out balls (pieces) / launch performance (100 shots per minute) = operation" Time ") can be obtained. In addition, the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value (one of the game performance information) described later.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the game machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activity against the game machine based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can display and control various information displayed on these devices. ing.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine via the frame external terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC". Predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start / end information, winning information, fluctuation start / fluctuation stop information of special symbols, prize ball number information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door opening, etc. Occurrence information such as setting changes). The above "data counter DT" refers to specific information about the game machine, such as the number of jackpots, the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol fluctuations), and the number of game executions between jackpots, based on the game information included in the outer end signal. It is a game information notification device that can notify, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is a pachinko hall that monitors and collects the game progress status of the game machine based on the game information included in the outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall. (Amusement store) This is a dedicated management computer.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type verification of the game machine based on the rules regarding the certification of the game machine and the type verification, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Hotsukyo). Therefore, it is possible to output a type test signal for specifying the game operation in real time from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. When installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in a pachinko hall, no change in the conforming control program is permitted. Therefore, the type test signal is repeatedly output processed even after being installed in the pachinko hall.

Further, in the main control unit 20, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203 and a setting key are inserted and an ON / OFF operation is performed to change a set value. Allowable setting change Allowable state (ON) and setting change prohibited state (OFF) can be switched between the setting key switch 94 and the setting change switch for changing the set value (details will be described later) under the setting change allowable state. The 95 and the setting change completion switch 96 for determining the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, 98 are formed at appropriate positions inside the game machine that the player cannot see from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts against the set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the switches 94, 95, 96, 98 are from the outside of the game machine. The ON / OFF operation is impossible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display 97. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, and the relay board (relay board for relaying the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: FIG. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 (not shown).

(About set value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player such as the ball output rate (so-called machine discount, PAYOUT rate) in stages. The above "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

The "set value" defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage. The higher the set value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability (big hit). The winning probability) is set high, and it works in favor of the player. Such a set value can be provided with at least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value). In this embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, and setting 3 is 1/192. 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, setting 6 is 1/180, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the "set value" is a value that defines the events that affect the machine discount for each stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a special event such as a big hit. That is, the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability and / or the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability can be configured to be different depending on the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/200 to 1/180 and the rate of increase is 4 times, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/50 to 1/44.

Further, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. Only a certain jackpot 1 to 3 may be configured to be high (in this case, the jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) May be configured to be high only (in this case, the winning probabilities common to all set values for jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device and the winning probability of the support time reduction may be changed according to the set value as in the case of the large hit described above. The details of the big hit, the small hit, and the support time reduction will be described later.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched to the circulation type and displayed in the usage range of settings 1 to 6 as shown in. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes a setting means capable of setting a set value regarding the probability of winning in a big hit lottery (random number lottery). In addition, it may be a "game machine without setting" which does not have the setting function as described above. Further, the set value is not switchable to a plurality of stages, and may be a "game machine with a one-stage setting function" provided with only one set value. "Game machine with one-step setting function" means a type in which setting values can be set, but there is only one setting value, and mainly "game machine with setting function" and "setting". It is used to facilitate the design by providing design compatibility and versatility when designing a new model with "None Game Machine". This game machine with a one-step setting function is substantially the same as the "game machine without setting" in that the set value has only one step. In the case of a one-step setting game machine, even if the setting change switch 95 is operated, the display value of the setting display 97 is a certain setting value such as "1 → 1 → 1 → 1 → ...". Is displayed, and the setting operation itself of the set value is possible.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent a goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter, referred to as "performance information") related to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and is connected to the main control unit 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of the display. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation, and for example, abnormalities in ball ejection performance occur due to illegal adjustment of game nails or goto acts. Information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the game machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance (game performance information)". .. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect described later. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the game machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is low (normal probability) and there is no electric support described later) and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal). The number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (number of outs during normal times ÷ number of outs during normal times x 100 base value: normal) The hour-based value) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information", and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance indicator 99. As for the base value, the value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and the measurement of a new base value is started again. In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative number of outs measured during all game states (including during the winning game). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program related to the display control and the base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are defined in an area (out-of-area memory) different from the area (in-area memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on a payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( Status signal) transmission, etc. The main control unit 20 can send a control command related to payout (“payout control command” for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29 when it is necessary to pay out the balls, while the main control unit 20 can send the payout control command. The payout control board 29 can transmit the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), and the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opened / OFF when closed) for detecting the open / closed state of No. 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is detected by a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball) of the game ball payout device 19. ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a fullness detection sensor 60, a door open sensor 61, a replenishment shortage detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b as the above state signals. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "Supply out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, Abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating "counting error signal" and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). The prize ball error) and whether or not the upper saucer 9 is full (ball jam error) are monitored.

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and the launch operation handle 15 The game ball is launched by the operation of. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted provided that the game ball is present (detection of the touch state) and the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating a fixed range of hard random numbers. Counter for 8 bits), interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and is related to time information in real time and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and soft random number generation means (for example, random number generation means for production lottery).

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, controlling the sound of the speaker 46, and various other types. Light emission control of the effect LED (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LED), operation control of various movable body accessories (clock type accessory 80, flower type accessory 90), and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is developed by a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data required for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 displays light on the light display device 45a including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b in order to execute an image display effect, a light effect, a sound effect, or a movable body effect. Movable accessory motors 80c, 91c that operate the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the acoustic generator 46a including the control unit and the speaker 46, and the movable accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, arm 92). , 92c is provided with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if the malfunction occurs, performs a predetermined error notification process.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and the direction keys 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , Various effect patterns (variable display operation of decorative patterns, notice effect, etc.) are developed in chronological order, and a "effect scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is configured so that it is possible to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up / down / left / right direction, etc.) (operation identification means), depending on the operation mode. The structure is such that the production can be executed and controlled.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in the interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a game operation related to the game machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 receives a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time elapses, displays the result as a special symbol. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start opening 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, when the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined "loss" mode. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived by.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of the above may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Further, unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol" It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing it from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbol reflects the "big hit" (hit symbol: for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", "right", three decorative symbols are "7" " 7 ”and“ 7 ”are displayed in the stop display mode).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is played more than in the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening by the opening door 52b is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses, or the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is the maximum number of winning balls (maximum number of winning balls). The winning area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory, or the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game" such that the big winning opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the condition for ending the round game (closing condition) is satisfied) is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above-mentioned jackpot game starts, the opening effect (production during the start INT) is first performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game has a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (maximum round). It is performed multiple times up to the number). Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, the ending effect (effect during the end INT) is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of jackpot games is completed. When the current round game is completed, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (integ between rounds). In addition, "in-round production" appears during the round game, and "inter-round INT production" appears during the round game (during the inter-round INT). That is, the jackpot game is roughly classified into each game period of the opening period (start INT period), the round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery of the loss type (If there is only one type of big hit, small hit or loss, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) is provided by the effect control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, reach effect or pseudo-ream effect (including the number of pseudo-reams) described later). it can. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of the reach effect (including the specification of the type of reach), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of the reach effect, and "pseudo-ream" that specifies the execution of the pseudo-ream effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as "with reach fluctuation pattern" and "pseudo-ream normal fluctuation pattern" in which execution of pseudo-ream effect is specified and execution of reach effect is not specified. Further, with respect to the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern is basically set in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect. Hereinafter, the reach fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "reach fluctuation", and the normal fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "normal fluctuation".

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. are decided, and according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the advance notice effect during the decorative symbol variation display game Controls the variable display effect of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games". In addition, for convenience of explanation, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly the special symbol variation display game) is set to "number of symbol variation" or "number of variation" or "* rotation ("*" is a natural number). ) ”.

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol variation display game)
Further, in the game machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (opens), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting opening open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) Elapsed, or until the number of winning balls to the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be open or expanded, and one of these conditions is satisfied. In that case, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. The lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
In the present embodiment, each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins a prize during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, the small hit game, or the normal electric open game. When it occurs, that is, when there is an input of a detection signal from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is used as the start right of the variable display game. As such data, except for those related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages, which is a predetermined upper limit, is retained and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, each operation holding ball of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball", "special figure 2 operation holding ball", and "special figure 2 operation holding ball", respectively. It is also called "Public figure operation hold ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The game machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, changes from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the public electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the reachless loss fluctuation). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (Shortened), the number of lottery times per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from (when is not operating) to twice (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases. Therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. Compared to the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-operating), the gaming state is advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state (electric support state)".

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in the present embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically the same game state as the above normal state. It is placed below and the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function, operate at the same trigger. However, when the above-mentioned normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function are individually focused on, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start opening 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit or the ball output It becomes a "high base game state (starting port entry advantageous state)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. The "high-base gaming state" here refers to a gaming state when a function related to a normal symbol (at least one function of a normal symbol probability change function, a normal symbol time saving function, and an opening extension function) is activated, and is a special symbol. This is different from the gaming state when at least one of the special symbol probability change function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high probability state". When the above-mentioned special symbol time reduction function is activated, the average execution time (average fluctuation time of the special symbol) of the special symbol variation display game becomes a "special symbol time reduction state" shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the open extension function is provided is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state". If it is, it means that there is an electric chew support state. In the present specification, "without electric support state" is referred to as "without electric support" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric chew support state" is referred to as "with electric support" or "electric support". Called "state".

(3-2-1. Internal gaming state (game status determination number YJ): FIG. 43)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, the main control unit 20 side has these functions. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state". What kind of internal gaming state the current internal gaming state is is managed by using an identifier of "game status determination number YJ". For example, when the game state determination number YJ is "00H", "normal state (normal)" is specified, when "01H", "probability change state (probability change)" is specified, and when "02H", "time reduction" is specified. Specify the'state (time saving)', and in the case of "03H", specify the'latent state (latent)'.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): FIG. 43)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. Details will be described later. For example, the probabilistic state includes a plurality of types of probabilistic states such as "probability change modes 1 to 3", and the time saving state includes a plurality of types of time saving states such as "time saving modes 1 to 3". These are included and managed as different gaming states using an identifier of "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The substance of this "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode" is an identifier (variable pattern selection mode) used when selecting the "variable pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 31 to 41)" corresponding to the current gaming state. Data that identifies). For example, when the probabilistic change state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is classified into "probability change modes 1 to 3", the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode corresponding to the probabilistic change state (YJ = 01H) is set to "01H". (Probability variation mode 1) "," 02H (probability variation mode 2) ", and" 03H (probability variation mode 3) are defined. This makes it possible to select different fluctuation pattern distribution tables for each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3. Become.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbol) are at least. It is determined in association with the current game state (variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result (see S413 in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 31 to 41 described later).

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal game" When focusing on the "state", for example, although the same "probability change state", with respect to the variation pattern of the special symbol, different game states (probability variation modes 1 to 3) (different variation pattern selection modes (variation pattern distribution designation) The variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (number Tcode)) can be selected, and the effect related to the variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) can be executed.

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, and the "game state" focusing on the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect). By managing the "variable pattern selection mode (variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode))" as different ones, different variable pattern selection modes (for example, probabilistic variation) are used even though they are in the same internal gaming state (for example, probabilistic variation state). It is possible to select a variation pattern of a special symbol corresponding to modes 1 to 3). As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the digestion time (variation time of the special symbol) of the symbol variation display game and the related effects, and under the same internal gaming state. It is possible to have a wide variety of productions in.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, and the like (see the column of "YJ" in FIG. 43). On the other hand, there are more types of gaming states (game modes) related to the determination of fluctuation patterns of special symbols, that is, fluctuation pattern selection modes (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) than types of internal gaming states. , "Normal mode", "Probability change mode 1", "Probability change mode 2", "Probability change mode 3", "Time saving mode 1", "Time saving mode 2", "Time saving mode 3" and the like (see the column of "Tcode" in FIG. 43). ..

Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, at least the game state related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as "game mode" (see the column of "game mode type" in FIG. 43). As shown in FIG. 43, this game mode is a game state related to the “variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode and the game state determination number YJ (internal game state)”, in other words, “a game captured as a whole game machine”. It can also be treated as a "state". For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may not be distinguished and may be simply referred to as the "gaming state". Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode may be referred to as "variation pattern selection mode" or simply "Tcode".

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the winning type (big hit type, support time saving type, loss type), hit game operation mode, and transition destination game state after hit game (transition destination game mode).

(4-1. About hit type)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the winning type (win type) of the jackpot lottery target, as shown in the figure, "10R probability variation jackpot", "4R probability variation jackpot", "4R time saving jackpot (4R non-probability variation jackpot)", etc. Multiple types of hits are included. These hits belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small hits) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for performing the round game, and is specified. The combination of the special symbols of is displayed, or when the game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that won the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). .. In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing an electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state). ..

Therefore, when the "small hit" is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so that the internal gaming state does not shift (the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning). Is not done). However, the transition control of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. In addition, in the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, the round game like the big hit is not executed, but it looks like it depends on how the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined. It is possible to realize a "pseudo-round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed.

The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as that of the big hit game, except that the round game is not executed. Specifically, after the elapse of a predetermined start INT, a "opening / closing operation game (pseudo round game)" for opening the large winning opening is executed, and when the opening / closing operation game is completed, a series of operations is performed after a predetermined end INT. The small hit game of is finished. Such a small hit is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) of a hit game (special game state) that involves opening and closing of the big winning opening, similar to a big hit, and is simply a "loss" property. To be different. Although the "small hit" is not provided in the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. it can.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

In "10R Probability Change Big Hit", the maximum number of rounds is set to 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game may reach the maximum number of winnings (10). It is a big hit set to a sufficiently promising "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)". In addition, the maximum number of rounds for "4R probability variation jackpot" and "4R time reduction jackpot" is set to 4, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is the same "long opening time" as 10R probability variation jackpot. It is a big hit to be set. The profit status (profit degree) during the jackpot game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot becomes higher as the maximum opening time becomes longer. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

It is up to you to decide what kind of opening pattern the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game should be. For example, the opening pattern of the large winning opening related to at least some round games (round games of a specific number of rounds) may be set to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the long opening time. , It may be set to be a shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". In addition, during the maximum opening time, the large winning opening may be continuously opened, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "1.3 seconds opening + 0.5 seconds closing + 27 seconds opening"). May be.

(4-3. About the transition destination game state after the hit game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state to be transferred after the end of each of the above-mentioned big hit games will be described. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / transition destination game state" shown in FIG. 4, the game state at the time of winning and the game state to be transferred after the winning game (transition destination game state) are shown according to the hit type. The relationship is shown. The "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the internal game state type at the time of winning (the corresponding game mode type in parentheses), and the "transition destination game state" is the internal game state type of the transfer destination. (In parentheses, the corresponding game mode type) is shown. Details of the game mode to be shifted will be described later.

(If you win the 10R probability variation jackpot)
In the case of "10R probability variation jackpot" or "4R probability variation jackpot", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, the game shifts to the "probability variation state" after the jackpot game. In the case of this "probability change state", it is possible to continue until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variation) ends the predetermined specified number of times, or until the jackpot is won within the predetermined specified number of times. Then, when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the probability change state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) (the same applies to the time saving state described later). )). That is, the probability change state is terminated when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) is completed by the specified number of times without a big hit.

In the present embodiment, after shifting to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least high, a special symbol variation display is performed without winning a jackpot (excluding "small hits" that do not trigger a transition to the internal gaming state). When the game is completed a predetermined number of times, the high probability state is terminated and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability, which is a "finite probability variation type" "number-cut probability variation machine (ST machine)". Hereinafter, if necessary, the upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number of times". In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 65536 times (see remark (3) in FIG. 4), and due to the jackpot lottery probability, the probability change state is substantially guaranteed until the next jackpot is won. Probability change ". Whether the number of STs is infinite or finite (for example, 100 STs, 50 STs, etc.) can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

(If you win the 4R time saving jackpot)
In the case of "4R time saving big hit", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, after the big hit game, it shifts to the "time saving state". When the time is reduced, the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed continues until the specified number of times is completed, and a big hit is made within the specified number of times (excluding small hits that do not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state). ), When the special symbol variation display game ends, the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. In the case of the present embodiment, the specified number of times related to the time saving state includes "100 times", "200 times", and "65535 times (substantially continued until the next big hit)" including the time saving state related to "support time saving" described later. Etc. (see remarks (2) in Fig. 4). The number of time reductions related to the time reduction jackpot may be a finite time reduction such as 100 times or 200 times, or an infinite time reduction such as 10000 times or 65535 times that can be substantially continued until the next big hit winning. The number of times may be appropriately determined according to the playability.

(About loss)
Further, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of loss types A, B, and C having different symbol lottery rates are provided on the special figure 1 side. In the case of this embodiment, the relationship satisfies "Loss A> Loss B> Loss C". For example, Loss A is 95%, Loss B is 4%, and Loss C is 1%. Although the special drawing 2 side shows an example in which one type of loss A is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of loss may be provided.

(About support time reduction)
In the present embodiment, a big hit (short-time big hit) is used as an opportunity as an aspect of the addiction relief function (supporting privilege) or for the purpose of expanding the degree of freedom of the game and improving the fun of the game. Instead, there is a "support time reduction" that grants a "time reduction state". This "support time reduction" is characterized in that a time reduction state is given without going through a big hit winning (condition device operation, accessory continuous operation device operation).

(A. Special electric operation type support time reduction)
If you win the "support time reduction", the condition device will not operate (the continuous accessory operating device will not operate either), but in the same way as if you win the "small hit", the special electric accessory will be activated to open and close. The game may be executed (the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening pattern). In the present specification, the support time reduction for operating the special electric accessory is referred to as "special electric operation type support time reduction", and a series of opening / closing operation games resulting from this is referred to as "support time reduction opening / closing game". Similar to the small hit game, the support time saving opening / closing game can be configured to include a predetermined start INT, an opening / closing operation game for opening / closing the large winning opening, and a predetermined ending INT. Therefore, if the special electric operation type support time reduction is won, the time reduction state will be given through the support time reduction opening / closing game.

In addition, when "small hit" and "special electric operation type support time reduction" are provided, the mode of the small hit game and the support time reduction opening / closing game (opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening and the production during the game (opening production (starting INT production) ), Ending production (directing during the end INT), etc.), it is possible to conceal which one was won. This makes it a mere small hit winning or a short support time winning. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation. Of course, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is different, and the start INT and the end INT (opening effect and / or ending effect) are different, and the appearance is different. Alternatively, it may be notified which one was won in a directing manner.

(B. Special electric non-actuated support time reduction)
Further, the time may be shortened after the winning game is completed (given after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed) or when the next game is started without operating the special electric accessory. In the present specification, such a support time reduction is referred to as a "special electric non-actuated support time reduction".

It is up to you to adopt one or more of the above-mentioned special electric operation type support time reduction and special electric non-actuation type support time reduction, or to adopt one or more of both support time reductions. In this embodiment, an example in which the "special electric operation type support time reduction" is adopted will be described.

The "support time reduction" according to this embodiment is the target of the big hit lottery, and like the big hit, the winner is won with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/500) (the winning lottery target form). In detail, one of "big hit", "support time reduction", or "loss" (including "small hit" if a small hit is provided) is drawn by the winning lottery, and the "support time reduction" is won. Then, the support time reduction type (for example, any of the support time reductions A to C) is determined by lottery by a symbol lottery (see the remarks column (4) in FIG. 4). Although the lottery probability of the support time reduction is common to all the set values, the lottery probability may be different for each set value, or the same lottery probability may be used for a part of each set value.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of types of support time reductions A, B, and C are provided on the special figure 1 side, and a plurality of types of support time reductions B, C are provided on the special figure 2 side. By lottery, one of the support time reductions is determined based on a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see the symbol lottery rate column in FIG. 4). In addition, the support time reductions A to C have different time reduction performances. Specifically, it is as follows.

(A) If you win the "Support Time Saving A", you will be given 100 times of time saving, which is the same as the time saving state given by the big hit (4R time saving big hit) (small privilege).
(B) If you win the "Support Time Saving B", you will be given 200 times of time saving, which is more than the time saving state given by the big hit (medium privilege).
(C) If you win the "Support Time Reduction C", you will be given 65535 times of time reduction (substantially continuing until the next big hit), which is larger than the time reduction state given by the big hit (a big privilege). When the number of time reductions is set to 65535 times, due to the jackpot lottery probability, the time reduction state is substantially guaranteed until the next big hit is won, which is "infinite time reduction".
To be precise, the infinite time reduction means that the number of time reductions is "unlimited (infinite)", but for the number of time reductions (for example, 10000 times) in which the time reduction state is substantially guaranteed until the next big hit. In this specification, it is treated as belonging to "infinite time saving". In addition, even when the number of indigestible time reductions (for example, about 5000 times) is given during the business hours of the pachinko hall, it can be treated as belonging to "infinite time reduction".
It is up to you to adopt one or more types of support time reductions A to C. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on what kind of support time reduction should be provided on any special map side. For example, at least one of the support time reductions A to C may be provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side, or at least one of the support time reductions A to C may be provided only on one special figure side. Good.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, it is easier to win the support time saving, which has higher time saving performance, on the special drawing 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special drawing 1 side (upper starting port 34 side). It is easy to win the 10R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special figure 2 side.

In the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when the support time reductions A, B, and C are won, the time reduction states are changed to 100 times, 200 times, and 65535 times (infinite time reduction), respectively. However, taking advantage of the peculiarity of shortening the support time, it may be configured as follows (Structure A) to (Structure G).

(Structure A: Fall transition avoidance function)
In order to prevent a “falling transition” situation such as a transition to a time-saving state with a low profitability, the following configurations (α1) to (α3) can be adopted.
(Α1) After the infinite time reduction is given, if the support time reduction for giving a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times or 200 times) is won, the infinite time reduction remains. For example, when the support time reduction A (time reduction 100 times) is won during the infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is controlled so as not to be updated to 100 times.
(Α2) If the support time is shortened during the probabilistic state, the winning can be invalidated. It should be noted that the winning of the support time reduction that grants the infinite time reduction does not have to be treated as invalid.
(Α3) In the present embodiment, when the electric support state is reached, a situation may occur in which the player “right-hands” and receives a lottery on the special figure 2 side, aiming for a big hit consecutive villa state. Therefore, in order to prevent a fall transition when receiving a lottery on the special figure 2 side, (1) no support time reduction is provided, (2) an infinite time reduction is provided, or support time reduction is provided on the special figure 2 side. (3) It is preferable to provide a support time reduction that gives more time reduction times than the time reduction jackpot (in the case of this embodiment, the time reduction number is more than 100 times).

(Structure B: Addition function)
If you win the support time reduction during the time reduction state, it will be added to the current number of remaining time reductions. For example, when the number of remaining time reductions is 50 times and the support time reduction A is won, the number of remaining time reductions is updated to "50 times remaining time reduction + 100 times = 150 times". However, it can be configured not to add more than a predetermined number of times (means for limiting the number of times of time reduction). For example, the upper limit of the number of time reductions due to the addition can be set to "300 times". If the support time reduction B (time reduction 200 times) is won when the remaining time reduction number is 150 times, it is limited to the maximum number of times "300 times" instead of "remaining time reduction number 150 times + 200 times = 350 times". To. Even if the additional restriction is applied, if the support time reduction C that gives the infinite time reduction is won, the restriction is lifted so as not to give the player a feeling of loss, and the infinite time reduction is achieved. (65535 times) may be given. In addition, when there is an addition, "+50!""+100" with respect to the number of notifications (displays) by the "remaining time reduction number notification effect (for example, countdown display)" described later, which notifies the remaining time reduction number of times in a dramatic manner. It is preferable to execute an "additional notification effect" that notifies that the number of time reductions has been added (increased), such as "!".

(Structure C: Infinite / finite time reduction promotion function)
Infinite time reduction can be granted when the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state (time reduction state promotion means). If the time reduction state is due to infinite time reduction, the support time reduction may be won or the number of time reductions may not be updated or may be updated. Further, instead of giving an infinite time reduction, a predetermined number of time reductions may be given. For example, if the support time reduction B is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction 200 times is originally given, but if the support time reduction state is won, the time reduction number of times, for example, the time reduction 300 times, is increased. It may be given. In addition, the maximum number of time reductions given by the jackpot and / or the support time reduction may be given. In the case of the present embodiment, since the infinite time reduction (65535 times) is the maximum number of time reductions, the infinite time reduction is given. Further, it may be configured to give an infinite time reduction or a predetermined number of time reductions only when a specific support time reduction is won during the time reduction state. For example, if the support time reduction A (high probability of winning) is won, only 100 times of time reduction is given, but if the support time reduction B (low probability of winning) is won, the infinite time reduction is given. May be good. When the number of time reductions increases, it is preferable to bring out the above-mentioned "additional notification effect".

(Structure D: Time saving jackpot and support time saving according to special design)
When the number of types of support time reduction on the special figure 1 side is "X" and the number of types of support time reduction on the special figure 2 side is "Y", the following relational expression (a) is satisfied.
"X" = "Y", "X"<"Y", or "X">"Y" ... (a)
If the above relational expression (a) is satisfied, set as "X = 0 (no support time reduction on the special figure 1 side)" or "Y = 0 (no support time reduction on the special figure 1 side)". May be good.
Further, one or a plurality of types of support time reductions having the same time reduction performance (number of time reductions) may be provided on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (for example, support time reduction B is provided in special figures 1 and 2). , One or a plurality of types of support time reductions having different time reduction performances (for example, support time reduction C is provided in special figure 1 and support time reduction B is provided in special figure 2) may be provided. Further, the support time reduction may be a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction, and the number of types is not particularly limited. Further, when the time saving jackpot is provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special drawing 2 side, the time saving jackpot having the same support time saving and the time saving performance may be provided, or the time saving jackpot having different time saving performance may be provided (). For example, when one special figure side time saving jackpot and support time saving are provided, these may have the same time saving performance or different time saving performance). In the case of this embodiment, since it is "right-handed advantage" during the electric support, that is, it is easy to receive the lottery on the special figure 2 side, the support time reduction provided on the special figure 2 side has a shorter time performance than the special figure 1 side. It is preferable to set a high support time reduction. When the support time reduction for giving the infinite time reduction and the infinite time reduction jackpot are provided, it is preferable to standardize the number of time reductions set as the infinite time reduction (for example, 65535 times) to reduce the control load.

(Structure E, Structure F: About the lottery probability of short support time)
(Structure E) It is possible to determine the winning probability of the support time reduction according to the set value. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction. In this case, the lower the setting, the more you can benefit from the shorter support time, which can contribute to avoiding addiction. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction. In this case, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate can be made without making a difference in the winning probability of the big hit according to the set value.
(Structure F) The winning probability of the support time reduction (the total winning probability may be the total winning probability when there are multiple support time reductions) is the same (approximately the same) as the jackpot winning probability at the low probability, preferably lower than that. It is preferable to do so. This is because the support time reduction is a "supporting privilege", and it is preferable not to win the prize with a high probability. For example, with setting 1, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/200 (see FIG. 4), so the winning probability of the support time reduction is set to be the same as or substantially the same as 1/200, or lower than that. It is preferable to set it (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/500). If the probability of winning the jackpot of the set value set in the game machine is the same or substantially the same, or lower than that, the probability of winning the support time is not excessively high, so that it is not necessarily specific. It is not necessary to use the set value jackpot winning probability, for example, the jackpot winning probability of the minimum setting 1 or the maximum setting 6 as a reference.

(Structure G: Special electric operation type support time reduction)
When a plurality of special electric operation type support time reductions are provided, the support time reduction opening / closing game modes corresponding to each support time reduction may be the same, but may be different. For example, in the support time reduction opening / closing game by the support time reduction A to C, the opening patterns of the large winning openings are different. Specifically, the opening time of the large winning opening 50 is 0.4 seconds for the support time reduction A, 0.8 seconds for the support time reduction B, 1.8 seconds for the support time reduction C, and the like. Further, when the opening patterns of the large winning openings are different, there is an advantage that even if the number of time reductions to be given is the same, the support time reductions can be different in the degree of advantage (profit state).

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect modes for producing effects related to the game state are provided, and the transition control between each effect mode is possible in response to the transition (update) of the game state. Specifically, the effect mode can be changed when the internal game state or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated (changed). The effect modes include "normal effect mode" related to "normal state", "probability effect mode" related to probabilistic state, "time saving effect mode" related to time saving state, and "hit middle effect" related to hit game. There are multiple types of production modes such as "mode" according to each game state. In addition, in each effect mode, a background display (background effect) is provided as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode. , It is changed to the production mode related to the game state.

For example, under the "normal production mode", the first background production reminiscent of the season "spring" (for example, the background production that displays the background image of the cherry tree) is associated with the season "summer" under the "time saving production mode". A second background effect (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea), and a third background effect (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) that is reminiscent of the season'autumn'under the "probability effect effect mode". (Background effect to display), etc., which can suggest the game state during the stay. Not only the background display is changed, but also the BGM, the decorative pattern (picture), the hold display mode, and the like can be changed to the effect mode related to the game state. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode can be changed according to the number of big hit consecutive villas and the number of remaining time reductions (see, for example, FIGS. 7A and 7B described later).

(5-1-1. Production stage)
Further, at least one effect mode includes a plurality of types of "effect stages", and it is possible to shift between these effect stages. This effect stage is an aspect of the effect mode that produces an effect related to the gaming state, like the effect mode. For example, in the normal state, as the production stage belonging to the normal production mode, the "cherry blossom stage (production stage A)" that displays the background image of the cherry tree and the "rape blossom stage (production stage B)" that displays the background image of the rape blossoms. ) ”,“ Gamo Koei Stage (Direction Stage C) ”, etc., in which the background image of Gama Koei is displayed, and the production according to each production stage appears. These effect stages A to C may be shifted, for example, when a certain advance notice effect (for example, a stage change effect described later) is executed. The above-mentioned effect stages A to C belong to the normal effect mode, and the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself of each effect stage is the same. Therefore, in any of the effect stages A to C, the fluctuation pattern distribution table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern is the same.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and is a functional unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. ). Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 specifies an effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state, or the game state. The game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or variable pattern selection mode (Tcode)) is grasped based on the information included in the specific effect control command that specifies that the main control unit 20 is to be transferred. The production mode is managed in a way that is consistent with the game state on the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. Has been done. The specific effect control commands described above include, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, and a specific command (big hit start command, big hit end command) transmitted during a hit. If the effect control unit 24 can independently determine the game state, it is possible to control the transition of the effect mode or the effect stage regardless of the specific effect control command.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is a big hit based on at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command (specifically, the fluctuation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command, the information included in the winning command described later, etc.). It is configured so that various "notice effects" related to the lottery result can be executed and controlled (notice effect execution control means). The main role of the notice production is to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation (well-known "winning expectation") of whether or not the winning type (including support time reduction) has been won, and the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a specific notice production (notice) Suggestion of specific notice occurrence expectation). Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute at least the above-mentioned effect mode (including the effect stage described later) and the effect related to the big hit lottery result (at least the winning lottery result). Most of the advance notice productions work as "fanning effects" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", "step-up production", "stage change production", and "look-ahead notice production". Along with these effects, there are various advance notice effects (cut-in effects, etc.) that occur in a complex manner (simultaneously or overlappingly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The above-mentioned "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (variable display mode accompanied by a reach state), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. The "reach state" means that a part of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game is generated (big hit winning) in the stage before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed is performed while forming a part of the display mode, and a big hit is generated by using the variable display mode of the decorative decorative symbol. It is a variable display mode that suggests that the display mode shown is easy to be derived (there is a possibility of winning a big hit) and allows the player to expect a big hit. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) indicating the jackpot winning (big hit occurrence) is a set of symbols such as "7 (left symbol)", "7 (middle symbol)", and "7 (right symbol)", it is predetermined. On the winning effective line, a part of the decorative symbol is a part of the symbol alignment, and the left symbol and the right symbol display "7" (so-called tempai state), and the middle symbol (remaining that does not constitute the tempai state). The symbol) is in a state of performing fluctuation display while performing high-speed fluctuation, frame advance, swing, enlargement / reduction, deformation, and the like. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become a "big hit", and the finally derived result is not a stop display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot. In that case, the result of this game will be "missing". In the above example, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the tempai state (reach symbol) are symbols constituting the reach state and are also referred to as “reach constituent symbols”. Further, the timing of reaching the reach state is also referred to as "reach timing" or "tempai timing".

The above-mentioned "reach effect" includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, the conventionally known "N reach (normal reach)" and "SP reach (super reach)" in which the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when N reach appears are included, and this "SP reach" is included. Many of them have a relatively long production time (variable time) than N reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning a big hit. Further, the SP reach includes special SP reach such as "SP reach", "SP reach + SPSP reach", and "SPSP reach". The contents of each reach will be described below.

(R1) "N reach" notifies the game result (hit or miss (information related to the big hit lottery result)) without SP reach only by passing through the normal reach state after the normal fluctuation. It is a variation mode when it ends, and it is a reach production with the lowest expectation of winning. The N reach includes N reach 1 and N reach 2 having different winning expectations, and the relationship between the winning expectations is "N reach 1 <N reach 2".
(R2) In "SP reach (normal SP reach)", the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach (N reach 1 or N reach 2), and then the game result is notified and the game ends. This is the reach variation mode of the case.
(R3) In "SP reach + SPSP reach", after the normal fluctuation, the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach, and once the loss is notified, the player wins the first reach effect. This is a reach variation mode when a second reach effect (SPSP reach) with a high degree of expectation occurs (developed into another SP reach system) and the game result is notified and ended (hereinafter, also referred to as "developed SPSP reach"). ).
(R4) "SPSP reach" normally goes through the normal reach state after fluctuating, but does not go through the first reach effect (SP reach), that is, is omitted, and immediately the second reach effect (SPSP reach). Is generated (directly developed into SPSP reach), and this is a reach variation mode when the game result is notified and the game is terminated (hereinafter, also referred to as “direct hit type SPSP reach”).

The degree of expectation of winning in the reach production changes mainly according to the high or low selection rate of the reach production. For example, the selection rate in relation to the jackpot lottery result so that there is a relationship of winning expectation of "N reach 1 <reach N2 <SP reach <developed SPSP reach <direct hit type SPSP reach" between the normal reach. Is stipulated. Further, for example, among the reach during the probable change shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, "Churensochu reach A <Churensochu reach B" and "Daliansochu reach A <Daliansochu reach B <Daliansochu reach C" The big hit lottery so that there is a relationship between the winning expectations of "Time saving medium reach A <Time saving medium reach B <Time saving medium reach C" between the reach during the time saving shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. The selectivity is defined in relation to the result.

The actual winning expectation varies depending on whether or not other advance notice effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are involved. For example, even when an advanced SPSP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of the direct hit SPSP reach. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, Churensochu reach A, Churensochu reach B, Daliansochu reach A, Daliansochu reach B, Daliansochu reach C, time saving medium reach A, time saving medium reach B and short-time medium reach C are treated in the same line as the reach belonging to "SP reach", but in some cases, the middle-time and medium-time reach A and short-time medium reach A, which have low expectations for winning, should be treated in the same line as "N reach". Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the reach effect is passed through in the process of deriving and displaying the combination of decorative symbols indicating the jackpot. For this reason, the presence or absence of reach is a clue for the player to know the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, a plurality of types of "expected advance notice effects" are provided as an effect mode that announces (suggests) the possibility of reach, in other words, an effect mode that can more clearly announce the degree of expectation of winning. This "expectation notice production" plays a role as a fanning production that announces the degree of expectation of winning, but it is possible to announce that a specific production (for example, reach production) may occur, or a specific production. It also plays a role of foretelling that the production is definite. Therefore, for example, in the reach effect scenario, a certain advance effect may occur before the reach effect occurs, foretelling the possibility of the reach effect and also foretelling the winning expectation. That is, the winning expectation may be clarified and the winning expectation may be higher if one or more expected advance notice effects are accompanied, as compared with the case where the reach effect occurs alone. Such expected notice production includes a "pre-notice effect" that can occur before the reach effect and a "post-notice effect" that can occur during the reach effect.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
In the present embodiment, as one of the expected advance notice effects, there is a "pseudo-ream effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as" pseudo-ream ")". The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" means that a part or all of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped during one decorative symbol variation display game (using one or more pseudo-ream-dedicated symbols instead of the normal decorative symbols). A variable display mode in which a display operation such as re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol is executed from the temporarily stopped state is repeated one or a plurality of times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

Basically, the rate of occurrence of "pseudo-ren" is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the expectation of winning a notice, for example, SP reach, is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is twice than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is once. Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect, it is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after performing one or more pseudo fluctuations, the reach which is the main variation. The production is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present specification, when it is referred to as "pseudo-N", it means the total number of times of pseudo-variation M times and this variation. For example, when it is expressed as "pseudo 2", it means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and when it is expressed as "pseudo 3", it means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation" (for example, pseudo fluctuation in FIG. 32). 2 + SP reach, pseudo 3 + SP reach, etc.). Further, when pseudo-reams 2 to 3 are not attached, it means "no pseudo-ream", and pseudo-ream does not occur (for example, N reach 2 and SP reach in FIG. 32).

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "player participation type production" as one of the expected advance notice productions. The "player participation type effect" belongs to the so-called "button notice effect", and a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, etc.) is performed on the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75). When repeated hits, etc.) are performed, the content of the effect can be changed based on the operation content. In the player participation type effect, during the predetermined button validity period, the "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation is executed, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. Then, based on the operation content, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect during operation), and depending on the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation, the winning expectation degree, the winning result, or the setting suggestion information Etc. can be notified. The effect control unit 24 sets the operation validity period (button validity period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type production). Means, pre-operation effect control means for controlling a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button valid period, and post-operation effect control for controlling a predetermined post-operation effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation valid period. It has the means.

(5-2-4. Step-up production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "step-up notice production" as one of the expected notice productions. The "step-up notice effect" is an effect mode in which one or a plurality of stage effect steps are used. Specifically, the first stage effect (step 1) to the plurality of stage effects (step N (N ≦ 2)). This is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is increased when the stage is developed to a higher stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage is developed to the final stage). For example, the three-stage production SU1 If it is a step-up production consisting of ~ SU3, "Direction SU1 (Step 1): Winning expectation is low", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 (Step 2): Winning expectation is medium", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 → Production" The higher the production step stage, the higher the expectation of winning, such as "SU3 (step 3): high expectation of winning." In addition, some step-up productions belong to the player participation type production, for example. , The operation of the operation means (effect button 13 or the direction key 75), or the elapse of the button validity period may lead to the development to the previous stage.

(5-2-5. Stage change production)
Further, in the present embodiment, a "stage change effect" may occur as one of the expected advance notice effects. "Stage change effect" means that the current effect stage is changed to another effect stage during the symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game). It is a notice production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by shifting. In "stage change production", the production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning according to which production stage the current production stage shifts to, and the type of cut-in production that occurs when the current production stage shifts (for example, after a blue background) The stage transition to the production stage is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is low, and the transition to the production stage after the red background indicates the expectation of winning. However, this stage change effect is an effect mode in which the "effect stage" changes as a notice effect, and even if the stage change effect occurs, the game state (YJ, Tcode) shifts (changes) and the background is displayed. Etc. are not changing. In addition, the stage change production may shift from one production stage to another production stage in order to prevent the production from becoming monotonous due to the continuation of the same production mode, not as a preliminary production (for example). , See the production stage of FIG. 51 described later).

(5-2-4. Look-ahead notice production: Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B)
"Look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "look-ahead notice") refers to an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that has not yet been used to execute a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). , By utilizing the hold display mode and the effect in the symbol variation display game that is executed first in chronological order, the winning expectation of the operation holding ball (not only the winning expectation of the jackpot, but also the support time reduction described later) It is a production mode that can notify in advance (which may include the degree of expectation of winning).

The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5A, including the pre-reading notice. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of the special figure 1 operation hold balls and the number of the special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 to be displayed is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or an off state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending spheres is notified by the dashed circles in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball corresponds to the operation hold ball. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among all the activated holding balls in the hold display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. The display modes of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are usually switched to the operation state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation hold balls existing at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, only three. Therefore, this hold display unit acts as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold balls. However, when executing the look-ahead notice described later, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 corresponding to the hold display unit is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this acts as a means of generating a look-ahead notice.

Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and its state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5A, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern or a notice effect, the operation-holding balls of Special Figures 1 and 2 are held. , A sub-display area 79 capable of displaying information on the number of balls on hold for normal map operation, information on the variable display operation of the special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the normal figure is provided. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative symbol and / or the hold display unit is hidden in displaying the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently in progress and how many operation-holding balls are by the information in the sub-display area 79.

Depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), the display area of the hold display area 76 is displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 77 (for example, preferentially displayed or displayed larger), and vice versa. The display area of the hold display area 77 can be displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 76. For example, during the first gaming state (normal state (normal mode)), the hold display area 76 is highlighted, during the second gaming state (for example, time saving state (time saving mode) or probability changing state (probability changing mode)). Middle) can highlight the hold display area 76. Further, both the hold display area 76 and 77 are displayed during the first game state, and the hold display area 77 is preferentially displayed during the second game state (for example, only the hold display area 77 is displayed). Can be done.

(About pre-reading notice)
Next, the look-ahead notice will be described. Regarding the appearance control related to this look-ahead notice, first, when the operation hold ball is generated in the main control unit 20 (when the start condition is satisfied), the operation hold ball is a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). The "look-ahead hit judgment (look-ahead winning judgment, look-ahead symbol judgment)" is performed to determine in advance the big hit lottery result (winning lottery result, symbol lottery result) related to the operation pending ball before being used for execution. See "Random number determination process-Special stop symbol data creation process (steps S318-S319)" and "Special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process-Special stop symbol creation process (steps S410-S411)" of FIG. 11 to be described later. ).

Furthermore, using the above-mentioned "look-ahead hit determination" result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the operation holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see "Random number determination process at the time of winning a start opening (step S320)" in FIG. 11). This pre-determined variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to as a "look-ahead variation pattern". In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach fluctuation pattern goes through, or whether the normal fluctuation pattern does not go through the reach state.

Since the pre-reading variation pattern is determined by using at least the winning lottery result (in this embodiment, the preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery), the pre-reading variation pattern information includes the "winning variation" at the time of winning. Not only information on whether it is a "pattern" or a "loss fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning a loss (information on the winning lottery result), but also the presence or absence of reach (if there is a reach, its type) and the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream (pseudo). Execution information may also include specific advance notice effects, such as information on (the number of times if there is a series). In this way, a series of processes for determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern through the look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs the effect control process related to the look-ahead notice. Specifically, when the look-ahead determination is executed, the "hold addition command" that can specify the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the look-ahead determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern When the main control unit 20 sends a "winning command" capable of specifying information (at least the information obtained by pre-reading the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives these commands. , Based on the information contained in the command, the effect control process related to the hold display and the look-ahead notice is performed.

Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command and the winning command, a "look-ahead notice lottery" is performed regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the look-ahead notice based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information. Then, when executing the look-ahead notice, an effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice is created, and the look-ahead notice is displayed according to the effect scenario (see FIGS. 5A and 5B described later). The look-ahead notice is executed with a higher probability for the "big hit" than for the "loss", and for the look-ahead fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated. The pre-reading notice is for the pre-reading ball for the current operation hold ball at the timing when the operation hold ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that is performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. Notice may appear.

In the above-mentioned hold addition command, the data on the upper byte side that enables the identification of the special figure type information (different from the special figures 1 and 2) and the data on the lower byte side that enables the information on the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination and the data on the lower byte side that can be specified. It consists of 2 bytes with. In addition, the winning command is composed of two bytes, the upper byte side data (MODE1) for designating the winning result and the lower byte side data (EVENT) for specifying the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern as the look-ahead determination information. .. In addition, instead of using the two commands of the hold addition command and the winning command, one command may be used for transmission. For example, hold addition in which the data that can specify the special figure type information and the operation hold ball number information at the time of pre-reading determination is the upper byte side data, and the data that can specify the winning result information and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information is the upper byte side data. A command (or a winning command) may be sent, and a look-ahead notice may be executed based on the command.

(Pre-reading notice at the time of winning: Hold change notice)
In this embodiment, when executing the look-ahead notice (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example. , From the white color of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to the white flashing of the notice display, the hold display with special hold colors and colors of blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors (special hold display mode). A changing pending change notice can be executed. Since this notice of change on hold can appear at the time of winning (holding display), it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning time system".

As a notice of this hold change, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is confirmed as a big hit. It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) that will be displayed. The blinking white icon display is a hold icon that suggests the possibility of the "step-up hold change notice" described later, and is expected to be the final hold color (hold color). May remain blinking white without changing). In the case of blinking white, if the hold display remains the same, the winning expectation is the lowest among the special hold displays, but if it changes to another hold color, the winning expectation due to the hold color increases.

In the present embodiment, regarding the advance notice effect, if the big hit lottery result is lost, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a big hit, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a notice production with a high expectation of winning, such as, if the expectation of winning is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value (in this embodiment, the expectation of winning is 20% or more), the "high expectation (expectation of winning) "High" notice production, and the others are treated as low expectation notice effects. In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectations of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors are 1%, respectively. If it is 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, 100%, "green, red, rainbow color" belongs to the high expectation notice production, and the others (blinking white, blue, yellow) are low. It belongs to the expectation notice production. When a look-ahead notice occurs, a high expectation notice (high number of pseudo-reams, SP reach, etc.) with a relatively high winning expectation during the symbol variation display game targeting the operation pending ball ), Combined with the content of the pre-reading notice production, the expectation of winning the winning will be further increased.

The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation holding ball has been digested, the display position of the holding display unit corresponding to the existing operation holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In this respect, the look-ahead notice is a single symbol variation such as a pseudo-ream in that a dedicated advance notice effect can appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It is different from the advance notice effect performed during operation.

The special hold display related to the hold change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the hold display, and (B) a normal hold display (white) when a prize is won. However, there are cases where the normal hold display is changed to a special hold display (blue, etc.), and (C) the special hold display, which has a relatively higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display, is changed (for example, from blue to yellow or higher hold). In some cases, the color is changed step-up). In the case of (B) or (C), a predetermined timing during the shift display, a predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific advance notice effect, and a hold. It is possible to change from one hold display mode to another hold display mode during a player-participation type production for a change notice (for example, during a button operation valid period). It should be noted that the hold change notice that changes to the hold display with a higher winning expectation as in (B) or (C) above is referred to as "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the symbol variation display game is related to this time. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball may be notified to the player even during the game, but the hold display mode of the game execution hold K at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game. May change to other hold display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the hold K during game execution is also treated as belonging to the above-mentioned step-up hold change notice.

As a general rule, there is no "falling down of the special hold display" that changes from the current holding color to the holding color with a relatively low expectation of winning, but if there is an exceptional downfall, the operation holding ball is correct. It is suggested that this is the same premium notice of change on hold as the notice of reservation. An example of a downfall is a case where the hold color changes to a hold display such as "blue → white" or "red → blue", which has a lower expectation of winning than the current hold display. In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display by still images (static display mode), but the hold icon display by moving images (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon is rotated, vibrated, swayed, and blinked ( It may be displayed with high-speed blinking or low-speed blinking).

(Pre-reading notice during design fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned "winning time system", the "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" that is performed when the symbol variation display game is started can be displayed. This pre-reading notice during change is also referred to as a pre-reading notice of "design change middle system (change start time change system)" because it can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol change display, unlike the above-mentioned pending change notice.

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a notice image dedicated to pre-reading on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games (single or continuous display). ) Is a look-ahead notice. That is, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation temporarily reserves the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and the start condition is satisfied during a certain symbol variation display game. At the same time, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, and when this look-ahead notice lottery is executed, if there are a plurality of operation hold balls (hold memory) existing at that time, , All or part of the reserved memory, the symbol variation display game can be expressed in some relation. For example. (For example, a preview image imitating the lightning bolt of FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, a look-ahead notice in which all or a part thereof is different may appear. For example, when appearing over three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image display expressing how it rains from a thundercloud) or. The thundercloud image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning may differ depending on the preview image. In the above example, the thundercloud image can have a low expectation, the rain image can have a medium expectation, and the lightning image can have a high expectation. In this case, if only the thundercloud image is finished, the winning expectation is low, but if the lightning bolt image is displayed, the winning expectation can be dramatically increased. In addition, it may be a step-up type look-ahead notice in which the degree of expectation gradually develops (the degree of expectation increases) in the order of "thundercloud image-> rain image-> lightning bolt image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice during change and the notice of pending change can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the notice of pending change and the lottery for executing the notice of pre-reading during change are independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases where the pending change notice is generated independently, cases where the variable look-ahead notice is generated independently, and cases where the pending change notice and the variable look-ahead notice are generated simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined.

(Example of pre-reading notice production mode: FIG. 5B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of the look-ahead notice effect woven by the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the decorative symbol is in the variation display), the upper start opening 34 is won and the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is held. Assuming that the number is 3, the second operation hold ball on which the fluctuation start operation is executed is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. Here, the hold change notice and the change look-ahead notice are given. Indicates a case where and is duplicated. Further, here, it is assumed that the first and third operation-holding balls held earlier are the operation-holding balls for which the pre-reading notice is not executed (pre-reading lottery is not won).

As shown in FIG. 1 (1), the effect control unit 24 changes the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, to the special hold display. At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the look-ahead notice is maintained as the normal hold display (white). In the figure, the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (○) mark) to the special hold display (hatched circle mark). Shown. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. Note that FIG. (1) shows that the symbol variation display game currently being executed has ended, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "246" corresponding to the loss.

The game progress shifts to the figure (2), and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball on the special symbol 1 side, which was the first (oldest operation hold ball). The operation hold ball is digested (one is digested), and the effect control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and the operation hold ball is released. A hold display mode indicating one digested state is set, and the decorative symbol variation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice during fluctuation, a dedicated background image (lightning effect by displaying a lightning bolt image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

Then, the game progress shifts to the figure (3), and it is assumed that the symbol variation display game currently being executed ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "351" corresponding to the loss.

Subsequently, the game progress shifts to FIG. (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation hold ball, that is, the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The operation holding ball is started and the operation holding ball is digested, and the effect control unit 24 shifts the holding display mode corresponding to each operation holding ball to the left at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, which is the second. Start the decorative symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball. At this time, the special hold display of the hold change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the above shift, ends with the start of this symbol change display game (with the digestion of the operation hold ball), and then displayed as the game execution hold K. Will be done. In addition, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation (here, lightning bolt production) will also end at the end of the occurrence during this symbol fluctuation display game. FIG. 4 (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in FIG. It has been explained that the occurrence of the inside is terminated at the end, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game may be terminated at the end. In this case, the pre-reading notice during the change is terminated when the "special hold display" of the hold change notice is provided to the execution of the symbol change display game.

(5-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appear an effect mode (setting suggestion effect) that suggests information regarding the above "set value". For example, the setting suggestion effects as shown in (a) to (shi) below.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(S) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting region, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitively notify any one of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific set value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values) are suggested, and a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. .. In addition, the appearance rate is made different according to the set value, suggesting that the possibility of a certain set value is high / low, for example, it is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. It is also possible to do.

The appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Further, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, the image display effect, and the movable body effect can be used.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect can appear at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with or independently of the advance notice effect. Further, it can be made to appear not only in the symbol variation game but also in the big hit game, the "demo start waiting effect" and the "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later while waiting for the game to start.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-ream (a specific pseudo-ream mode or a specific number of pseudo-reams), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific look-ahead notice. By making it different according to the set value, the notice effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, "High setting rich" when a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of loss, "High setting rich" when a pseudo-ream 3 times (pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation) is likely to appear at the time of loss, a specific button When an operation effect appears, it suggests "setting 6 is confirmed". In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion effect appear by using the look-ahead notice effect. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and when one or all of the hold icons are changed to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

<6. Directing means ＞
Various effects in the game machine 1 are manifested by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, vibration device that gives vibration to the player. (For example, the launch operation handle 15 trembles), a wind pressure device that gives wind pressure to the player's body, or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the visual sense like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is a concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) and the transition control between the game modes (between the game states) will be described. FIG. 6 is a game flow showing an outline of the game mode and the effect mode related thereto.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a plurality of types of game modes such as "normal mode", "time saving mode", and "probability variation mode" are provided, and the game is played under these game modes. Progress is controlled. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous striking method according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of a left striking advantage (normal state), "design variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side". Is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), it is assumed that the “design variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side” is executed.

(7-1. About "normal mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state (YJ = 00H), and this normal mode is an initial stage that is started when the RAM in the area is cleared by a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation. It is in the game mode.

This normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a probability change state (YJ = 00H), and is a game mode in which the player can stay for the longest time while the game is in progress. Basically, the player wins a big hit or a support time reduction from this normal mode, and shifts to another game mode (probability variation mode or time reduction mode described later).

During the normal mode, the player stays in the "normal production mode" that produces an effect related to the normal mode. In the normal effect mode, as a background effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 7B (b) and 7B (c), an effect expressing an air battle in which fighters fly is displayed.

(7-2. About "probability change mode")
Next, the "probability variation mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the probabilistic mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probabilistic state (YJ = 01H), and the variation pattern selection modes are different probabilistic modes 1 to 3 (Tcode = "01H" to "03H"). Is included. This probabilistic mode shifts when a 10R probable jackpot or a 4R probabilistic jackpot is won (see FIG. 4).

In the case of this embodiment, at the time of the first hit (winning in the normal mode), the game shifts to the "probability change mode 1", and if the big hit is continuously won (consecutive villa) without falling from the probability change mode 1 to the normal mode. , According to the number of winnings (the number of consecutive villas), the transition is gradually made to "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3". That is, the number of consecutive villas is defined as a change condition (transition condition) of the game mode. For example, the number of consecutive villas is shifted to the probability change mode 1 up to the third time, and the number of consecutive villas is changed to the probability change mode from the fourth time to the sixth time. It shifts to 2 and shifts to probability variation mode 3 after the 7th consecutive villa (see FIG. 7A). Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the above-mentioned "number of consecutive villas" counting method used as an opportunity to shift to the game mode will be described.

The above "number of consecutive villas" will be described with reference to the "example of counting the number of consecutive villas" shown in FIG. 7A (a). As shown in Fig. (A), the count of the number of consecutive villas is basically "Probability change jackpot (first hit) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probability change state (2 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probability change state (3 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (4 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (5 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (6 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (7 consecutive villas) As in "...", the number of consecutive wins (number of consecutive villas) of the probabilistic jackpot until the transition to the normal mode (normal state) is counted. The "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", and "probability variation 3" shown in the figure indicate the probability variation mode 1, the probability variation mode 2, and the probability variation mode 3, respectively.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the time saving jackpot (4R time saving jackpot) is provided, it becomes a problem whether or not the time saving jackpot is to be counted as the number of consecutive villas.

<(A-1) Case where short-time jackpots are not counted (no count)>
As shown in the figure (A-1), the time saving jackpot may be excluded from the count of the number of consecutive villas. In the case shown in the figure, the time-saving jackpot won during the probability variation mode 1 of the second consecutive villa is not counted (no count). In the case of this case, the actual number of consecutive villas for a big hit is 7, but the number of consecutive villas is counted as "5 consecutive villas".

<(A-2) Case of clearing the count of the number of consecutive villas when winning a short-time jackpot>
As shown in the figure (A-2), when the time saving jackpot is won, the count of the number of consecutive villas may be cleared to zero. In the case shown in the figure, the number of consecutive villas becomes "zero" due to the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive villa's probability variation mode 1, and the probability variation jackpot won in the subsequent time-saving state is the first consecutive villa's jackpot, that is, the first hit. It is treated as the same count as the time.

When the probability variation jackpot is to be counted, it is free to adopt either the counting method (A-1) or (A-2) described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, all jackpots may be counted. In this case, as shown in the figure, even if the first hit is a short-time jackpot, this is counted as the first consecutive villa, and thereafter, until the player falls into the normal state (normal mode), the number of consecutive villas is counted each time the jackpot is won. Go +1. In the case shown in the figure, the time saving jackpot is 3 times (first hit, 3rd consecutive villa, 4th consecutive villa), and the probability change jackpot is 4 times (2nd consecutive villa, 5th consecutive villa, 6th consecutive villa, 7th consecutive villa). ), A total of 7 big hits were won, so the number of consecutive villas will be 7 times.

The "number of consecutive villas" is counted by the "number of consecutive villas counting means" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. The consecutive villa count counting means functions as a functional unit that counts the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won. The "number of consecutive villas" may be the number of times the jackpot is won by the jackpot to be counted, or the number of times the jackpot game is executed. Further, it may be the number of times of operation of the condition device or the continuous accessory operating device related to the jackpot to be counted. In the case of the present embodiment, in the jackpot winning game, a process of designating the game state after the jackpot game is performed (“Game state transition preparatory process during special symbol change start process (step)” in FIG. See S412) ”), and the number of consecutive villas counts the number of big hits.

In addition, although the support time reduction does not belong to the big hit, it is not counted, but the support time reduction may also be counted. However, if the support time reduction is to be counted, the special electric accessory will be activated and the prize ball will be obtained. It is preferable to exclude the "special electric non-actuated support time reduction" that cannot be counted. In addition, a "small hit" in which a special electric accessory is activated may also be counted. Since the condition device and the continuous accessory operating device do not operate for the special electric operation type support time reduction and small hit, when counting these, the number of executions of the support time reduction opening / closing game and the small hit game (the number of operations of the special electric accessory) Should be counted.

(7-2-1. Features of probabilistic mode)
Next, the feature points of the probabilistic mode (probability mode 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be described. As described above, the probability variation modes 1 to 3 are game modes in which the variation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) are different (see FIG. 43), and the variation pattern distribution tables corresponding to the probability variation modes 1 to 3 (FIG. 33, (See FIG. 34) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create a probability variation mode in which each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3 is characteristic.
For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds (for example, normal variation) is selected with high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 2, the variation pattern is selected. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 3 (Fig.). 34 FH11, FH15, FH19). In this way, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol related to each probability variation mode, in other words, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time or unit time of the symbol variation display game per game). Number of executions of the symbol variation display game per hit: Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "average digestion time"). The average digestion time of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is at least the average digestion time at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each probability variation mode.

In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time related to the probabilistic mode is defined to satisfy "probability mode 3 <probability mode 2 <probability mode 1". That is, in relation to the fluctuation state between the probability variation modes, the probability variation mode 1 is controlled under the “high speed fluctuation state”, the probability variation mode 2 is controlled under the “medium speed fluctuation state”, and the probability variation mode 3 is controlled under the “low speed fluctuation state”. That is, the average digestion time is controlled to be longer as the number of consecutive villas increases. If the average digestion time in each mode satisfies the above-mentioned relationship of "probability change mode 3 <probability change mode 2 <probability change mode 1", the time is not particularly limited, but the probability change mode is a game related to the probability change state. Since it is a mode and the "special symbol time saving function" operates during the probability variation mode, each fluctuation state is at least shorter than the average digestion time of the normal mode (normal state).

As described above, the reason for defining the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the probability variation mode in "probability variation mode 3 <probability variation mode 2 <probability variation mode 1" is as follows.

In recent years, in order to moderately suppress the agitation of gambling, regulations have been set on the ball ejection performance of game machines by legal request. For example, the ball output rate (safe ball / out ball) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the above type test is limited from the upper limit ball output rate "300% (old standard)" to "220% (new standard)". (Rules for certification of gaming machines and certification of types, etc. Appendix 4 Technical standards for pachinko gaming machines (related to Article 6) (1) Standards for performance (c), etc.). This regulation has a great influence on the ball ejection performance, especially the ball ejection performance at the time of consecutive villas, and if this regulation is observed, the "ball ejection speed" of the ball ejection can be reduced to about 2/3 of the conventional ball ejection performance. Specifically, if the launch time is 1 hour, the number of out balls is 6000 (the launch performance of the launcher 32 is 100 shots / minute x 60 minutes = 6000 shots), and according to the old standard, the upper limit ball ejection rate is "300". % ”, So safe balls are allowed up to 18,000 shots per hour (6000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots / h). However, since the upper limit of the ball output rate is limited to "220%" under the new standard, the upper limit of safe balls will be reduced to 13200 shots per hour (6000 shots x 220% = 13200 shots / h). Especially in the time saving state and the probable change state, it will be under the high base state (under the state with electric support), so if the big hit is excessively consecutive, the upper limit ball output rate 220% (13,200 shots) will easily be exceeded. It will be non-conforming in the type test. For example, when the base value in the state with electric support is 70 (BA70), the number of safe balls in the open game is 4200 (BA70 × 100 / min × 60 minutes = 4200) in one hour. Therefore, under the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13,800 shots" of "18,000 shots-4200 shots" by a jackpot game, but under the new standard, "9000 shots" of "13200 shots-4200 shots". Only pay out. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is required to devise a device to control the ball ejection performance so that the ball ejection performance can be easily passed (conforming) without impairing the ball ejection feeling as much as possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of consecutive villas increases, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game becomes longer, and the ball ejection speed when a big hit is consecutive villas increases extremely. We are trying to suppress this.

On the other hand, by adjusting the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game according to each game mode (here, each probability change mode 1 to 3), the degree of freedom of game playability and production is increased, and the game is deepened. You can also let it. Specifically, the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that emphasizes playability, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game". .. During the probability change mode (probability change state), it becomes "state with electric support + high probability state (special symbol probability change function operation) + special symbol time reduction state (special symbol time reduction function operation)", and at least the symbol variation display game compared to the normal mode. The average digestion time of the game is relatively short, and the game state is devised so that the big hit can be easily won. However, in such a game state, some players may enjoy the production. Many players want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation mode 1, it is easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time, and a “high-speed variation state” is generated. On the other hand, under the "medium speed fluctuation state" or the "low speed fluctuation state", the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the "high speed fluctuation state", but instead, it is possible to take a longer production time. Because it can be done, it is useful for a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production".

As described above, regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the relationship of "probability variation mode 3 (low speed variation state) <probability variation mode 2 (medium speed variation state) <probability variation mode 1 (high speed variation state)" is given. Therefore, in particular, regarding the "loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34)" that is referred to at the time of loss that is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game, it is preferable to have the following configurations (T1) to (T19). .. The present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three probabilistic modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention has a probability variation mode in which the number of consecutive villas is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation mode A") and a probability variation mode in which the number of consecutive villas is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation mode B"). When the average digestion time between the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B is compared, the configuration may satisfy the relationship of "probability variation mode A <probability variation mode B" (modification examples A and modification described later). The same applies to B). Hereinafter, when the term "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B" is used, the meaning of "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3" is also included.

(T1) The average fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T2) The average fluctuation time of reach fluctuation is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T3) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation having the highest selectivity is lengthened.
(T4) The fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selectivity is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T5) The selectivity of normal fluctuation is lowered in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T6) The selectivity of reach variation is increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T7) The fluctuation time of the shortest normal fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T9) The types of normal fluctuations are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T10) The types of reach fluctuations are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T11) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T12) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns having the first fluctuation time or less are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T13) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time", the probability variation mode A has no fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the probability variation mode B has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more.
(T14) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time", the probability variation mode A has a fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less, and the probability variation mode B has no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less.
(T15) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode 1 and the probability variation mode 2 have no variation pattern of the second variation time or more, and the probability variation mode 3 has the second variation time or more. There is a fluctuation pattern.
(T16) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode 1 and the probability variation mode 2 have a variation pattern of the first variation time or less, and the probability variation mode 3 has a variation pattern of the first variation time or less. There is no fluctuation pattern.
(T17) In the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, the variation selected when the operation hold ball at the start of the variation (excluding the operation hold ball used for the current variation display operation, the number of existing operation hold balls) is 0. The fluctuation time of the pattern is a common (same or substantially the same) fluctuation time, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times can be selected. For example, in the probabilistic variation modes 1 to 3, when the number of balls on hold is 0, the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, the normal fluctuation 8s in the small villa, the normal fluctuation 8s in the middle villa, the normal fluctuation in the Dalian villa) Only the fluctuation 8s) is selected, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times can be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation holding ball is other than 0 is lengthened in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”.
(T18)) The normal variation is common in the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selectivity of the reach variation is set to the high probability in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”. For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selectivity of the reach variation is set to the high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3".
(T19) The normal fluctuation is common between the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a high probability in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”. For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach variation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3".

Since the operation holding balls are likely to be accumulated during the electric support state, the above-mentioned configurations (T1) to (T6) are set by paying attention to the fluctuation pattern that is easily selected when the number of operation holding balls is relatively large. It can be said that it is important to adopt the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table that has. On the other hand, since it is difficult for the operation holding ball to accumulate in the state without electric support as in the latent probability state, the above-mentioned "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode" In order to realize "1 (high-speed fluctuation state)", the loss fluctuation pattern distribution having the configurations (T1) to (T19) is focused on the fluctuation pattern that is easily selected when the number of operation holding balls is relatively small. It is important to have a table.

Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution table of the winning system shown in FIG. 33 can be configured as shown in (T20) to (T27) below.

(T20) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach variation that is easily selected when winning is lengthened.
(T21) When the degree of advantage (profit degree) is "1st winning type <2nd winning type", it is relatively fluctuating time to win the 2nd winning type than to win the 1st winning type. Long reach variation is likely to be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T22) When the degree of advantage (the degree of profit) is "1st winning type <2nd winning type", the reach fluctuation when the 1st winning type is won is common (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is the same). The reach fluctuations that are likely to be selected when the second winning type is won are different (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuations is different). In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T23) The fluctuation time of the longest reach variation (first winning longest reach variation) that can be selected at the time of winning in the probability variation mode A is set to "R seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning in the probability variation mode B (second). When the fluctuation time of the winning longest reach fluctuation) is set to "S seconds"
R / S value (variation time extension rate at the time of winning) and
The fluctuation time of the longest reach variation (first loss longest reach variation) that can be selected at the time of loss in probability variation mode A is set to "T seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected at the time of loss in probability variation mode B (second loss longest reach). When the fluctuation time of (variation) is "U seconds",
It is different from the T / U value (variation time extension rate at the time of loss). In this case, "T / U"<"R / S" can be set. If the degree of advantage (profit degree) is "first winning type <second winning type", the first winning type The value of "R / S" is larger in the second winning type than in the second winning type.
(T24) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation that can be selected at the time of winning is at least lengthened for the winning type (10R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) with the highest profit.
(T25) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the longest reach variation among the reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning is selected for the winning type (10R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) of the highest profit. At least make it longer.
(T26) When the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning is relatively long. Become. Although not shown, for example, the fluctuation pattern distribution table referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of loss is referred to as a “loss variation pattern distribution table (for Churenso)” corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in FIG. In the case of a hit, the "probability change middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 33 is used according to the number of consecutive villas. In addition, "winning" means "winning winning" and / or "supporting time saving winning" (the same applies to (T27) described below).
(T27) When the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. Become. Although not shown, for example, the variation pattern distribution table referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of winning is the "probability variation middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (middle) corresponding to the probability variation mode 2 of FIG. (For consecutive villas) ”, and in the case of loss, the“ probability change during loss fluctuation pattern distribution table ”shown in FIG. 34 is used according to the number of consecutive villas.

In the case of the present embodiment, after the transition to the probability variation mode 3, the probability variation mode 3 is not shifted to another game mode until the jackpot is won or the number of STs is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variation number) is executed during the probability variation mode 3, the game may be shifted to another game mode (probability variation mode 1 or probability variation mode 2). This is because if the probability variation mode 3 in the low-speed fluctuation state continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode of "probability change mode 3 ⇒ probability change mode 2 or probability change mode 1", but "probability change mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ probability change mode 2 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ probability change It may be "mode 1" or "probability variation mode 3 (first variation number digestion) ⇒ probability variation mode 1 (second variation number digestion) ⇒ probability variation mode 2". When the first fluctuation number is K times and the second fluctuation number is L times, "K times" = "L times", "K times <L times", or "K times> L times" can be set. it can.

(Modification example A)
In the present embodiment, as described above, the above-mentioned "probability variation mode 3 (low-speed fluctuation state) <probability variation mode 2 (probability variation mode 2)" is used by using the loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34) corresponding to each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3. The relationship of "medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is realized, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, using the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one probability variation mode (one Tcode), the above-mentioned "probability variation mode 3 (low speed variation state) <probability variation mode 2 (medium)". It is possible to realize the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "rapid fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)". FIG. 35 shows an example of a probability variation middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (winning system variation pattern distribution table) according to the modification A, and FIG. 36 shows a loss according to the modification A. An example of the fluctuation pattern distribution table is shown.

First, an outline of this example will be described with reference to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. In this example, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for Korenso (number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) is used as the reference table (see Fig. 36 (a)), and Churenso (number of consecutive villas 4 to 6). At the time of the second time), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is acquired by adding the first addition time (for example, 5 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table (FIG. 36). See (b)). In addition, in the case of Dalian villa (after the 7th number of consecutive villas), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern specified in the above reference table plus the second addition time (for example, 10 seconds) is added to the fluctuation start this time. It is acquired as a time fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 36 (c)). That is, it is a variation pattern selection technique of acquiring variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of game modes by using a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one game mode. In the case of this example, since the value obtained by adding the predetermined time is acquired, the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern does not change as shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (b). The same applies to the “win / support time saving variation pattern distribution table” shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (b).

FIG. 36 (a) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used when the number of consecutive villas is 1 to 3 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, as the fluctuation pattern types to be selected, normal fluctuations 1 to 4 during probability variation (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during probability variation, and SP reach A during probability variation ( A representative example is shown in which the winning expectation is low) and the SP reach B during the probability change (winning expectation is high) is provided.

As can be seen from FIGS. 36 (a) to (c), although the selection rate of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as the number of consecutive villas increases. (The same applies to FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)). As a result, the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, "Korenso (high speed fluctuation state)" State) <Churenso (medium speed fluctuation state) <Dalianso (low speed fluctuation state) "can be realized.

Note that FIG. 36 (b) shows the addition of 5 seconds (first addition time) to each fluctuation pattern of the reference table, and FIG. 36 (c) shows 10 seconds (second addition) to each fluctuation pattern of the reference table. Time) It is configured so that the added value is acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (S1) to (S7).

(S1) At least one reach variation (N reach during probability variation, probability variation) is not added to the normal variation (normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation) by adding a predetermined time (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "addition"). Add to medium SP reach A and probable change SP reach B). For example, in the case of Churenso, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the probabilistic N reach of the reference table (Fig. 36 (a)), and in the case of Dalian Zhuang, 10 seconds (1st addition time) is added to the probable N reach. 2 Addition time) Add. It is preferable that the reach variation that is relatively easy to select (here, N reach during the probability variation with the highest selection rate during the reach variation) is added. Further, the first addition time and the second addition time may satisfy the relationship of "first addition time <second addition time" (the same applies to (S2) to (S5) described later).
(S2) Addition is performed for at least one normal fluctuation (normal fluctuations 1 to 4 during probability change), and addition is performed for reach fluctuation (N reach during probability change, SP reach A during probability change, SP reach B during probability change). Absent. For example, in the case of Churenso, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the probability change normal fluctuation 1 in the reference table (Fig. 36 (a)), and in the case of Dalian villa, 10 seconds to the probability change normal fluctuation 1. (Second addition time) Add. In addition, it is preferable to add the normal variation that is relatively easy to select (here, the normal variation 1 during the probability variation with the highest selection rate during the normal variation).
(S3) If there is a loss, it will not be added, and if it is won, it will be added. For example, in the case of winning, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and (c), 5 seconds (first addition time) is added, and 10 seconds (second addition time) is added, but in the case of loss, no addition is made. (In case of loss, use the reference table: Fig. 36 (a)). That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of winning is relatively long. In addition, "winning" means "winning" and / or "supporting time reduction winning" (the same applies to (S4) described later).
(S4) If there is a loss, it will be added, and if it is won, it will not be added. For example, in the case of loss, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and (c), 5 seconds (first addition time) is added and 10 seconds (second addition time) is added, but in the case of winning, it is not added (winning). In the case of, the reference table: Fig. 35 (a) is used). That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long.
(S5) At least the longest fluctuation pattern is not added. For example, SP reach B during probability variation is excluded from the addition target, and at least one fluctuation pattern among the fluctuation patterns having a shorter fluctuation time is the addition target (the content of addition is the above (T7) or (T8). be able to). The longest fluctuation pattern is because the original fluctuation time is long. The "longest fluctuation pattern" may be the longest of the lost fluctuations (FIG. 36) (in this example, SP reach B during probability variation), or in the table of the winning fluctuations (FIG. 35). It may be the longest one (in this example, SP reach B during probabilistic change).
(S6) A common effect can be performed during the first addition time or the second addition time. For example, "effect A" can be executed for 5 seconds of addition (during the first addition time), and "effect B" can be executed for 10 seconds of addition (during the second addition time). Further, in the addition 10 seconds (during the second addition time), "effect A (the same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the first 5 seconds, and "effect C (first addition)" is executed for the latter 5 seconds. It is possible to perform a production different from that during the time). It should be noted that the "directing A" is preferably a pseudo-ream. Further, "Direction B" is preferably a player participation type production.
(S7) If the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation (excluding the operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation, the existing number of operation-holding balls) is 0, the number is not added and the number of operation-holding balls is other than 0. Adds. This is because when the number of balls on hold is 0, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (in this example, only the reach fluctuation is selected), and it is not preferable to add them indiscriminately. The longest fluctuation pattern among the normal fluctuation types (in the case of this example, the normal fluctuation during probability change 3 or the normal fluctuation during probability change 4) may be easily selected.

(Modification example B)
Further, the relationship of "probability variation mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability variation mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability variation mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is not limited to the above modification A, and for example, FIGS. 37 and 37. As shown in 38, it can also be realized by using a fluctuation pattern distribution table that changes the selection rate (distribution value) of the fluctuation pattern according to the number of consecutive villas.

First, an outline of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 38. In this example, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for Korenso (number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) is used as the reference table (see Fig. 38 (a)), and Churenso (number of consecutive villas 4 to 6). At the time of the second time), the "first selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 38 (b)") in which the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table is changed is referred to.
Further, in the case of Dalian villa (after the 7th number of consecutive villas), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern defined in the above reference table was changed, but the "first selection rate fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (b)"". Refer to the “second selectivity variation table (FIG. 38 (c)”) having a selectivity different from that of the above.
Here, the reference table (Fig. 38 (a)) used at the time of Korenso (the number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) and
The above-mentioned "first selection rate fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (b))" used at the time of Churenso (4th to 6th consecutive villas),
The relationship of the average fluctuation time of the above "second selectivity fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (c))" used in Dalian villa (7th and subsequent consecutive villas) is
The selectivity is changed so as to satisfy at least the relationship of "second selectivity variation table (low speed) <first selectivity variation table (medium speed) <reference table (high speed)". Thereby, the above-mentioned relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" can be realized.
In the case of this example, since the change in the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the reference table is acquired, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to each fluctuation pattern distribution table is set as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (b). It does not change (the variation pattern specification command (MODE2 + EVENT1) does not change either) (the same applies to the "winning / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 37). In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-mentioned modification A in which the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table changes but the selectivity does not change.

FIG. 38 (a) shows a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used when the number of consecutive villas is 1 to 3 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, as in the above-mentioned modification A, as the variation pattern types to be selected, normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during probability variation , SP reach A during probability change (low expectation of winning) and SP reach B during probability change (high expectation of winning) are provided as typical examples.

As can be seen from FIGS. 38 (a) to (c), although the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of consecutive villas, and changes as the number of consecutive villas increases. It is easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long time (the same applies to FIGS. 38 (a) to (c)). As a result, the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, "Korenso (high speed fluctuation state)" State) <Churenso (medium speed fluctuation state) <Dalianso (low speed fluctuation state) "can be realized.

In addition, this modification can be configured as follows (P1) to (P15).

(P1) The average fluctuation time of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "". When "Z seconds" is set, the following relational expression (α) is satisfied.
"Y / X"<"Z / Y" ... (α)
The extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3" is larger than the extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2".

(P2) The fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the "second selection rate fluctuation table". When the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "" is "Z seconds", the following relational expression (β) is satisfied.
"Y / X"<"Z / Y" ... (β)
The extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3" is larger than the extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2".

(P3) The total selection rate of the normal fluctuations of the "reference table", the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is set to "X1", "Y1" and "Z1".
When the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "reference table", "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relational expression (γ) ) Is satisfied.
"X2"<"X1","Y2"<"Y1", and "Z2"<"Z1" ... (γ)
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game time from becoming unreasonably long. However, in a table other than the reference table, the reverse total selection rate may be used (“Y2”> “Y1” or “Z2”> “Z1” may be used).

(P4) When the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "reference table", "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "X2", "Y2", "Z2", the following relationship Equation (ε) is satisfied.
"X2"<"Y2"<Z2"... (γ)

(P5) The total selection rate of N reach fluctuations in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y3" and "Z3", and the total selection rate of SP reach is "Y4" and "Z4". , ”, The following relational expression (ε) is satisfied in the“ first selectivity variation table ”and / or the“ second selectivity variation table ”.
"Y4" ≤ "Y3", "Z4" ≤ "Z3" ... (γ)

(P6) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or "second selection rate fluctuation table", one or more specific fluctuation patterns are not selected (selection rate 0: lottery target, but the selection rate is Not selected for 0).
(P7) The shortest normal variation in the "reference table" is not selected in the "first selectivity variation table" and / or the "second selectivity variation table" (selectivity 0).
(P7) The longest reach variation in the "first selectivity variation table" and / or the "second selectivity variation table" is not selected in the "reference table" (selectivity is 0).

(P8) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of the longest normal fluctuation is the highest. When referring to the "selectivity" of a certain fluctuation pattern, when there are a plurality of the fluctuation patterns, the meaning of the total selection rate of these fluctuation patterns is included (the same shall apply hereinafter).
(P9) In the “first selectivity variation table” and / or the “second selectivity variation table”, the selectivity of N reach variation is the highest.
(P10) In the “first selectivity variation table” and / or the “second selectivity variation table”, the selectivity of SP reach variation is the highest.

(P11) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of normal fluctuation in the "reference table" is low, and the selection rate of normal fluctuation in the "reference table" is lowered. However, it is distributed to increase the selectivity of at least one reach variation. In this case, when there are at least a plurality of types of reach fluctuations of "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time <third fluctuation time", the reach fluctuation of the third fluctuation time is changed with high probability, and the first fluctuation time and the first fluctuation time are changed. 2 The selectivity of reach fluctuation of fluctuation time is not changed. Alternatively, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the first fluctuation time is not changed, but the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time and the third fluctuation time is changed (in this case, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time is changed). ≤ increase in reach variation selectivity in the third fluctuation time "or" increase in reach variation selectivity in the third fluctuation time ≤ increase in reach variation selectivity in the second fluctuation time " be able to).

(P12) The average fluctuation time of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selectivity fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selectivity fluctuation table" is "Z". When "seconds" is set, the selectivity of fluctuation patterns other than the longest fluctuation pattern is changed.
It is configured to satisfy "X seconds"<"Yseconds"<"Zseconds".
In this case, the fluctuation pattern that changes the selectivity (the fluctuation pattern other than the longest fluctuation pattern) may be "normal fluctuation" or reach fluctuation.

(P13) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" is assumed to change the selection rate of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns in the reference table, and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is a table different from the reference table. Use.
In this case, the following configurations (P13-1) to (P13-7) can be used.
(P13-1) The “second selectivity variation table” has more types of variation patterns (normal variation and / or reach variation) than the reference table (first selectivity variation table).
(P13-2) The "second selectivity fluctuation table" has fewer types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation and / or reach fluctuation) than the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table), but the average fluctuation time is longer. ..
(P13-3) The longest fluctuation pattern of the “second selectivity fluctuation table” is longer than the longest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table).
(P13-4) The shortest fluctuation pattern of the “second selectivity fluctuation table” is longer than the shortest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table).
(P13-5) In the "second selectivity variation table", reach variation is more likely to be selected than normal variation.
(P13-6) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have a common fluctuation pattern to be selected when the number of pending balls is 0 (operation). When the number of reserved balls is other than 0, the fluctuation pattern to be selected is different).
(P13-7) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have a common fluctuation pattern to be selected when the number of pending balls is 0 to 2. There is (the fluctuation pattern to be selected is different when the number of pending balls is three).

(P14) At the time of loss, a table in which the selection rate of the reference table is changed is used, but at the time of winning (at the time of big hit and / or at the time of short support time winning), a common table is used.
(P15) At the time of winning (at the time of big hit and / or at the time of short support time winning), a table in which the selection rate of the reference table is changed is used, but at the time of loss, a common table is used.

(7-2-2. About the production in the probability change mode)
Next, the effect in the probability change mode will be described. In the present embodiment, as the probabilistic effect mode, the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 are provided. FIG. 7A (c) shows an example of the effect in the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3.

With reference to FIG. 7, the probabilistic effect mode 1 expresses an effect of intercepting an enemy aircraft, and the probabilistic effect mode 2 expresses an air raid on an enemy fleet or an enemy base by a dive bombing. The "detonation mode" and the probabilistic effect mode 3 are the "war bomb modes" that express the appearance of a strategic bomber attacking an enemy city. In other words, the probabilistic mode period is divided into three modes according to the number of consecutive villas: a production mode for small villas, a production mode for middle villas, and a production mode for Dalian villas, and stays in any of these three categories. Whether it is done or not is played mainly by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state such as high speed, medium speed, low speed) and the accompanying production (switching of background production, notice production, etc.). Will be notified. The display of "right-handed ⇒" in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) that encourages the player to strike right. Although the hold icon is not shown, the hold icon corresponding to the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 is displayed. Further, in the figure, the state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is shown, and if there is an operation holding ball, the decorative symbol variable display game is sequentially executed under the current effect mode.

If you win the time-saving jackpot, you will be transferred to the "time-saving production mode" shown in Fig. 7B, which will be described later. However, if you win the time-saving jackpot during the consecutive villa, it will be exclusively for the consecutive villa. (For example, the time saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. 43) is shifted to the time saving mode (for example, the time saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. 43), and as the corresponding effect mode, the "time saving effect exclusively for the consecutive villas" as shown in FIG. It may be configured to shift to the mode (special time saving effect mode). This special time saving effect mode is exclusively for the consecutive villas, for example, when you win a time saving big hit other than the first hit, or when the number of consecutive villas (for example, 4 consecutive villas (middle consecutive villas)) or more If you win, it is preferable to transfer. Specifically, the time saving state after the time saving big hit in the case of "the time saving big hit is not counted" in FIG. 7A (A-1), and the case 3 of the case of "counting all big hits" in FIG. 7A (B). It can be used as an effect mode related to the time saving state after the time saving big hit of the consecutive villas to the 4th consecutive villa. In the case of FIG. 7A (B), the time saving jackpot is counted, so it is preferable to display the effect image 761 that informs the current number of consecutive villas, such as "○ consecutive villas!", And FIG. 7A (A). In the case of -1), since the time saving jackpot is not counted (no count), it is preferable to display the effect image 761 such as "during the consecutive villa challenge" instead of notifying the number of consecutive villas. In the case of “Clearing the number of consecutive villas by winning the time saving jackpot” in FIG. 7A (A-2), it is preferable to shift to the time saving effect mode as usual.

(Result production)
In addition, it is possible to win the time saving big hit (4R time saving big hit) during the consecutive villas, and to make the result effect appear in the final fluctuation (100th rotation) at the end of the time saving number of times. This "result effect" is, for example, the number of jackpot consecutive villas acquired so far and the total number of balls acquired in the winning game (total number of prize balls) as predetermined game information when the symbol changes when the time saving state ends. It is an effect of notifying the final result such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-08642: FIGS. 50 to 56, etc.). Here, when the support time reduction is won and the time reduction state is entered (shifted) without going through the first hit, specifically, the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B that grants a finite time reduction is entered. In that case, the result effect may be executed in the final variation in which the number of time reductions ends, but it is preferable not to execute it. The reason is that if you enter the time saving state without winning the big hit and the time saving state ends without winning the big hit, the total number of prize balls is very small and the result production is shown. This is because there is little need to put it out.

However, when going through the first hit, the significance of notifying the number of consecutive villas and the total number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) increases. Therefore, if the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B is won after the first hit, it can be said that it is preferable to execute the result effect in the final fluctuation. For example, as shown in the remarks columns (3) and (4) of FIG. 40, the final variation is used as the variation pattern for the result effect, and in the case of the time saving mode 1, the longest normal variation in the time saving mode 1 (for example, the normal variation). 40s), in the case of the time saving mode 2, the longest normal fluctuation (for example, normal fluctuation 45s) in the time saving mode 2 can be selected and the result effect is displayed by using the effect time width (variation time). Can be made to. In this case, different result effects (for example, different display modes of game information, different background images, etc.) can be displayed between the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. Of course, the longest normal fluctuation shows the same result effect (for example, the display mode of the game information, the background image, etc.) as the same fluctuation time or the same fluctuation pattern in the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. You may let it out.

(About other productions)
In addition, the effects related to the probabilistic mode can be configured as follows (Probability 1) to (Probability 5).
(Probability 1) The appearance rate of the player participation type production is set to be high in the order of "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3".
(Probability 2) The appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to low probability or high probability in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B".
(Probability 3) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the appearance rate of pseudo-reams is set to a high probability (the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern specified with pseudo-reams increases).
(Probability 4) Increase the number of pseudo-reams in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B". For example, the probability variation mode 1 is up to "pseudo 2", the probability variation mode 2 is up to "pseudo 3", the probability variation mode 3 is up to "pseudo 4", and so on.
(Probability 5) Regarding the reach variation (reach effect), the probability variation mode 3 includes at least the first variation pattern of the first variation time.
The probability variation mode 2 includes at least the second variation pattern of the second variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern.
The probability variation mode 1 includes at least the third variation pattern of the third variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern.
In this case, it is preferable to configure so as to satisfy the relationship of "third fluctuation time <second fluctuation time <first fluctuation time". For example, the probabilistic mode 3 includes at least an "advanced special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the advanced SPSP reach (SP reach + SPSP reach), and the probabilistic mode 2 includes at least an "advanced SPSP reach". Does not include "advanced special reach variation" and probabilistic mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "developed SPSP reach" and "advanced special reach variation". In this case, the SP reach effect executed in the first half section will be standardized, and when the SP reach effect appears, you can enjoy how far the reach effect will develop due to the difference in the probability variation mode. Become.
Further, for example, the probability variation mode 3 includes at least a "direct hit type special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the direct hit type SPSP reach (SPSP reach), and the probability variation mode 2 includes "SP reach including execution of a specific advance notice effect". ”, But does not include“ direct hit type special reach variation ”, and probability variation mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include“ SP reach including execution of specific advance notice effect ”and“ direct hit type special reach variation ”. .. In this case as well, you can enjoy how far the reach effect develops depending on the difference in the probability variation mode.

(7-3. Time saving mode)
Next, the "time saving mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probability change state (YJ = 01H), and the time saving modes 1 to 3 (Tcode = "04H" to "06H") in which the variation pattern selection modes are different. Is included. When the above-mentioned "special time saving effect mode" is provided, the time saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") can be provided (see FIG. 7A (b), FIG. 42 remarks column, and FIG. 43). This time saving mode is shifted to the case where the 4R time saving big hit or the support time saving A to C is won (see FIG. 4).

In the present embodiment, when any of the 4R time saving jackpot and the support time saving A to C is won, the time saving mode 1 is first shifted to, and the time saving mode 2 and the time saving mode are changed according to the number of times saved. Can be moved to 3. That is, according to the number of executed games in the time saving state, the time saving mode is changed from one time saving mode to another time saving mode. In other words, the mode is changed from one time saving mode to another time saving mode according to the number of remaining time saving times. Specifically, referring to the block frame of the “time saving mode” of FIG. 6 and FIG. 7B, the time saving mode 1 stays up to 100 times, and the time saving mode 2 stays up to 101 to 200 times. It is designed to stay in the time saving mode 3 for 251 times or more of the time saving.

Therefore, if you win the 4R time reduction jackpot or support time reduction A that is given 100 times of time reduction, you will stay only in time reduction mode 1, and if you win the support time reduction B that is given 200 times of time reduction, you will be in the time reduction mode. If he / she stays in 1 and the time saving mode 2 and wins the support time saving C in which the infinite time saving (65535 times of the time saving number) is given, he / she stays in the time saving modes 1 to 3. If the number of time reductions can be increased due to the above-mentioned "additional function" or the like, there are cases where the person stays in the time reduction mode 2 or the time reduction mode 3 even if he / she wins the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B. However, here, unless there is a particular need, the configuration without additions will be mainly described.

(7-3-1. Features of time saving mode)
Next, the feature points of the time saving mode (probability variation mode 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be described. As described above, the time saving modes 1 to 3 are game modes in which the fluctuation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) are different (see FIGS. 39 to 40 and 43), and the fluctuation pattern vibration corresponding to the time saving modes 1 to 3 A minute table (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create a time saving mode in which each of the time saving modes 1 to 3 is characteristic. This point is based on the same method as the probabilistic mode described above.

In the time saving mode of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time is defined so as to satisfy "time saving mode 1 <time saving mode 2 <time saving mode 3" (see Remark 2 in FIG. 7B). That is, as the number of time reductions becomes relatively large, in other words, the average digestion time is controlled in a short time each time the game mode is stepped up. In this respect, it is different from the probabilistic mode in which the average digestion time is controlled for a long time each time the game mode is stepped up. The reason for defining the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the time-saving mode in "time-saving mode 1 <time-saving mode 2 <time-saving mode 3" is as follows.

In the time saving mode (time saving state), unlike in the probability variation mode (probability variation state), the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability electric support state, so it is a gaming state in which it is more difficult to win the jackpot than in the probability variation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is adjusted to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the time saving mode. Specifically, in the case of the time saving modes 1 and 2, it is important for playability such as "enjoying the production" as "low speed fluctuation state" or "medium speed fluctuation state" in which the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is long. In the case of the time saving mode 3, the game mode is set to "high-speed fluctuation state", and the game mode emphasizes playability such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game". It is said. In particular, when the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) is set to "time reduction mode 1 <time reduction mode 2 <time reduction mode 3", there are the following advantages.

In the present embodiment, a time saving number of times larger than the conventional time saving number of 100 times can be given. In particular, if the number of time reductions is 200 times or infinite time reduction, and the number of times that can be a long time is given before the time reduction number is exhausted, the game digestion speed will be slow and the time reduction number will be exhausted. It causes stress and dissatisfaction to the player. Therefore, as the number of game executions during the time saving state increases, the game digestion speed is increased so that the next big hit can be won in the shortest possible time. Specifically, referring to the “time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table” of FIG. 40, the normal fluctuation 4s is easily selected in the time saving mode 1, and the normal fluctuation 2s is easily selected in the time saving mode 2. In the time saving mode 3, the normal fluctuation 1s (shortest normal fluctuation) is easily selected, and the game digestion speed is increased in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3". ..

As described above, regarding the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" is given. Therefore, in the time saving modes 1, 2 and 3 of the present embodiment, the following (J1) is particularly related to the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 40)" referred to at the time of loss that is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. It is preferable to have a configuration as shown in (J20). The present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three time saving modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention has a time-saving mode in which the number of game executions (variation number) in the time-saving state is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode A") and a time-saving mode in which the game is executed more than the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode B"). When the average digestion time of the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is compared, the configuration may satisfy the relationship of "time saving mode A <time saving mode B". Hereinafter, when the term "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B" is referred to, the meaning of "in the order of" time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3 "" is also included.

(J1) The average fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J2) Shorten the average fluctuation time of reach fluctuation in the order of "time reduction mode A ⇒ time reduction mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J3) In the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation having the highest selectivity is shortened.
(J4) In the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selectivity is shortened.
(J5) The selectivity of normal fluctuation is increased in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J6) Decrease the selection rate of reach fluctuation in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J7) The fluctuation time of the shortest normal fluctuation in each mode is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J9) The types of normal fluctuations are increased in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J10) Reduce the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J11) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more are reduced in the order of "time reduction mode A ⇒ time reduction mode B". The "variation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J12) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the first fluctuation time or less are increased in the order of "time reduction mode A ⇒ time reduction mode B". The "variation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J13) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the time saving mode A has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the time saving mode B has no fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more.
(J14) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the time saving mode A has no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less, and the time saving mode B has a fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less.
(J15) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time", the time reduction mode 1 and the time reduction mode 2 have a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the time reduction mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more. There is no fluctuation pattern.
(J16) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the time reduction mode 1 and the time reduction mode 2 have no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less, and the time reduction mode 3 has the first fluctuation time or less. There is a fluctuation pattern.
(J17) In the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected when the operation holding ball at the start of fluctuation is 0 is set as the common (same or substantially the same) fluctuation time, and the operation holding ball is set. If it is other than 0, fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times can be selected. For example, in the time saving modes 1 to 3, when the number of balls on hold is 0, only the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s) is available. It is configured to be selected, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times can be selected. In this case, in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is easily selected when the operation holding ball is other than 0 is lengthened.
(J18)) The normal fluctuation is common to the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to the low probability in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to the low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".
(J19) The normal fluctuation is common to the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to the low probability in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".
(J20) When the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of winning becomes relatively long. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. In addition, "winning" means "winning winning" and / or "supporting time saving winning".

In the present embodiment, the common time-saving medium reach A can be selected in the time-saving modes 1 to 3, and the common time-saving medium reach A and B can be selected in the time-saving mode 1 and the time-saving mode 2. Not limited to, if there is a relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" regarding the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the time saving In at least one time saving mode of modes 1 to 3, the reach variation different from the other time saving modes may be selected.

In the case of the present embodiment, after the mode is changed to the time saving mode 3, the time saving mode 3 is not changed to another game mode until the jackpot is won or the number of time saving times is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variation number) is executed during the time saving mode 3, the game may be shifted to another game mode (time saving mode 1 or time saving mode 2). Since the time saving mode 3 is a "high-speed fluctuation state", the game digestion speed advances at a good tempo, but if the same game mode continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. Resulting in. Therefore, when a predetermined number of games are executed during the time saving mode 3, it is preferable to shift to another time saving mode. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode of "time saving mode 3 ⇒ time saving mode 2 or time saving mode 1", but "time saving mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 2 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving It may be "mode 1" or "time saving mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 1 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 2". When the first fluctuation number is G times and the second fluctuation number is H times, "G times" = "H times", "G times <H times", or "G times> H times" can be set. it can.

(7-3-2. About the production in the time saving mode)
In the present embodiment, as the time saving effect mode, the time saving effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to the time saving mode 1 to 3 are provided. FIG. 7B shows an example of the effect in the time saving effect modes 1 to 3.

With reference to FIG. 7B, the time-saving effect mode 1 is the “underwater acoustic battle mode” that expresses the battle between submarines, and the time-saving effect mode 2 is the “water surface” that expresses the battle between the fleets. The "battle mode" and the time-saving production mode 3 are "land battle modes" that express the appearance of tanks fighting each other. In other words, the time saving mode period is divided into three time saving modes 1 to 3 according to the number of times the game is executed during the time saving state, and which of these three categories stays in is the above-mentioned probability variation mode. Similarly, the player is notified mainly by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, low speed) and the accompanying effect (switching of background effect, notice effect, etc.).

In addition, the production stage may be different depending on whether the mode is changed to the time saving mode due to the time saving big hit and the case where the time saving mode is changed due to the support time saving. In this case, while the time saving jackpot and the support time saving are in the same time saving mode (Tcode is the same), background production, decorative design, hold icon, launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect), various types according to each production stage. At least one of the effects such as the advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice (pre-reading notice during change and / or pending change notice) can be different production modes. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the time saving state due to the big hit and the time saving state due to the support time reduction in a dramatic manner while shifting to the same time saving mode for the time saving jackpot and the support time saving.

(About the notice production related to the support time reduction winning)
As already explained, the support time reduction includes "special electric operation type support time reduction" and "special electric non-operation type support time reduction", but in any case, the round game such as the jackpot game is not executed and is infinite. There are exceptions such as support time reduction that grants high time reduction frequency such as time reduction, but basically, the profit margin is lower than the big hit. For this reason, if a flashy fanning effect like that at the time of winning a big hit is made to appear in a notice production during a winning symbol variation display game with a short support time, the player's expectation will be excessively fueled. Therefore, when the support time reduction is won, it is preferable not to show the "winning effect" that definitely notifies the big hit winning as a notice effect. For example, if it is a hold change notice, the rainbow-colored hold of premium hold will not appear (in the case of a game machine that does not execute premium hold, the hold change notice of the highest winning expectation at the time of big hit winning will not appear), fluctuation If it is a preview effect inside, a specific character or item indicating the correctness is not displayed. In other words, when the support time reduction is won, the high expectation notice effect can be displayed at least except for the high expectation notice effect which shows the highest expectation at the time of the big hit. However, only the support time reduction (support time reduction C in the present embodiment) that gives the infinite time reduction that has the highest profit among the support time reductions may be configured to be able to execute the same accurate effect as the big hit. Further, when the support time reduction is won, the same winning effect as the big hit does not appear, but the winning effect for the support time saving may be executed.

In addition, in the look-ahead notice, if the operation hold ball protection of the support time reduction winning occurs, the look-ahead notice is prohibited for the predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of hold memories (4 times in the case of this embodiment)). May be good. Further, after the start of the time saving state due to the support time saving, the predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories) and the look-ahead notice may be prohibited.

(About winning production related to the starting port)
When the "winning effect" is enabled to be executed when the upper starting port 34 and / or the lower starting port 35 is awarded, different winning effects can be executed depending on the time saving state due to the big hit and the time saving state due to the support time saving. Can be configured in. It should be noted that the winning effect may not be executed in the case of the time saving state due to the big hit, and the winning effect may be executed in the case of the time saving state due to the support time reduction (or vice versa).

(About the effect of notifying the number of remaining hours)
Further, in the time saving mode (time saving state), the "remaining time saving number notification effect (for example, countdown display)" for notifying the remaining time saving number of times can be displayed. The residual time reduction number notification effect may be at least the same effect mode (the countdown display mode is the same) for the support time reduction A and the support time reduction B (support time reduction for granting a finite time reduction), or the time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction (support time reduction A and). / Or the same production mode as the support time reduction B) may be used. In addition, different production modes may be used depending on the type of support time reduction, or different production modes may be used for the time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction. In the former case of the same production mode, it is preferable to start the countdown display when the same division and the time-saving residual number of times reach a predetermined number of times. For example, a countdown display is performed from the remaining 10 times to the final fluctuation. In the latter case of different production modes, the countdown display can be started at different breaks. For example, in the case of a 4R time reduction jackpot, the countdown display can be started from the remaining 50 times, and in the case of support time reduction A (or support time reduction B), the countdown display can be started from the remaining 10 times.

In the case of a finite time reduction, the residual time reduction number notification effect is executed, but in the case of an infinite time reduction, the residual time reduction number notification effect does not have to appear. Further, in the case of infinite time reduction, it is preferable to display an effect that informs that the remaining time reduction number is infinite, such as "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(About the secret type residual time reduction notification production)
In addition, the fact that any of the support time reductions has been won may be kept secret in a dramatic manner. For example, the production in the game (notice production, etc.) that was won in each support time reduction is made to appear in common production, and the production of the residual time reduction number notification production is also a common production mode, for example, "remaining number of times ???""Remaining number of times 〇〇 times (the same initial value is displayed and countdown is displayed regardless of which support time reduction is won)" or "0 times (initial value is started from zero and counts up is displayed)" can do. As a result, the number of time reductions is kept secret, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension that it is unknown how many times it will continue (it is unknown when it will end).

In addition, when the above-mentioned "remaining number of times 〇〇 times" or the like is displayed and the countdown display is executed, it is preferable to perform the remaining time reduction number of times notification effect as described below. For example, when any of the support time reductions A to C is won, "100 times" with the smallest number of time reductions is displayed. When the count reaches zero, if you win the support time reduction B or the support time reduction C, which is given more than 100 times, additional display effects such as "+50 times!" And "+100!" Will be displayed. It does, and informs that the time saving state continues. On the other hand, in the case of the count-up display, regardless of which support time reduction is won, the count-up display is started from the zero display, and when the predetermined number of times is reached or each time the predetermined number of times is reached, "It will continue! "Remaining 50!" "Infinite time reduction confirmed!" And other additional display effects are performed to notify that the time reduction state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display effect after performing an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened, in order to arouse the tension of the player.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "residual time reduction notification effect" may not be executed in the case of the time reduction state due to the support time reduction, and the above-mentioned "residual time reduction number notification effect" may be executed in the case of the time reduction state due to the big hit. In the case of the time saving state, the above-mentioned "residual time saving number of times notification effect" may be performed, and in the case of the time saving state due to the support time saving, the above "remaining time saving number of times notification effect" may be performed.

(About the production related to the winning game (hit fluctuation pattern) with shorter support time)
In addition, in the normal mode (normal state), if the support time is shortened in this game, the winning effect of notifying the support time reduction winning in the game, and the fact that "the state with electric support" will occur from the next game are taken into consideration. For example, the “time saving rush notification effect 779” shown in FIG. 6A can be made to appear. In the illustrated example, the time saving rush notification effect 779 by the character image saying "I will rush into the time saving" is displayed, and the decorative symbol (usually, for example, a number symbol) is a symbol dedicated to the support time saving winning "" hour ". "☆" and "short" indicate the state in which the stop is displayed. This indicates in advance that the time saving state will be entered.

The reason for the appearance of such a "time saving rush notification effect" is as follows. When the support time reduction is "special electric non-actuated support time reduction", when the current game ends (variation time ends), the time reduction state is entered after the extremely short fixed display time (500ms) has elapsed (Fig.). 10 Special symbol change processing (step S307), special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308)). For this reason, it is for the purpose of notifying early that the right-handed hit is advantageous and preventing the player from continuing the "left-handed" (disadvantageous) during the time saving state. It should be noted that the launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) may appear during the winning game with a short support time. However, at this stage, it is not in a time-saving state but in a normal state, so if the player runs ahead and hits right, a launch guidance notification effect (left-handed instruction effect (warning notification)) that encourages left-handedness is provided. You may go. In this case, it is preferable to preferentially display the left-handed instruction effect (higher display priority) than the right-handed instruction effect. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the player is hitting right during the normal state can be determined by whether or not the entry (passage) of the game ball is detected in the normal symbol start port 37. On the other hand, in the case of "special electric operation type support time saving", since the time saving state is entered after the support time saving opening / closing game is executed, the launch guidance notification effect (right) during the support time saving opening / closing game (for example, during the start INT). It suffices to show the striking instruction effect), and no particular problem occurs.

Further, in the winning game with a short support time, the fixed display time can be set different from the normal fixed display time (500 ms). For example, it is preferable that the display time is longer than the normal definite display time (500 ms) (for example, about 1 second to several seconds). In this case, there is an advantage that a sufficient margin production time width for executing the above-mentioned "time saving rush notification effect" can be sufficiently secured by utilizing the long fixed display time. In addition, after the execution time (hit fluctuation time) of the winning game is completed, a longer fixed display time than usual intervenes, so there is a certain margin for the player to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed". There is also an advantage that the firing operation handle 15 can be operated. In addition, only in the winning game with a short support time, "right-handed notification" (for example, right-handed instruction image such as right-handed notification image 779) is given in advance by using a predetermined period during the winning game or at least the confirmed display time. You may do it.

(Modified example of time saving mode transition)
Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving jackpot and the support time saving are first shifted to the common "time saving mode 1" (contributing to the reduction of the control burden), but they are different for the purpose of diversifying the playability and the production. You may shift to the time saving mode. For example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the time-saving mode 1 is shifted, and in the case of support time-saving, the time-saving mode 2 is shifted. In this case, the 4R time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction A, which give the same number of time reductions, can be shifted to different time reduction modes (variable states). In this case, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the final fluctuation of the time reduction jackpot and the final fluctuation of the support time reduction may be different. For example, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation can be shortened by the support time reduction than by the 4R time reduction jackpot. In addition, by shifting to different time reduction modes for the time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction, for example, the time reduction state due to the 4R time reduction jackpot advances the game under the low speed fluctuation state, and in the case of the support time reduction A, the medium speed or high speed fluctuation. The game can be advanced under the state (normal fluctuation time or average fluctuation time is different), and the game playability and production can be varied. In this case, the stop operation patterns of the decorative symbols described later may be the same, but it is preferable that they are different.

Further, when a specific support time reduction is won among a plurality of types of support time reductions, the mode may be shifted to a time reduction mode different from that when other support time reductions are won. For example, in the case of the support time reduction A and the support time reduction B that give a finite time reduction, the time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) or the time reduction mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) is shifted, and the support time reduction C that gives an infinite time reduction is a time reduction It shifts to mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state), and so on. That is, a part or all of a plurality of types of support time reductions may be shifted to different time reduction modes. In this case, in the case of the support time reduction C, it is preferable to shift to a time reduction mode 1 other than the time reduction mode 1 in the low speed fluctuation state.

(About finite time reduction)
Here, when a finite time reduction is given by the support time reduction, the following grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form Ω1)
When there are a plurality of types of time reductions due to big hits (type number A), the types of time reductions due to support time reduction (time reduction state) are defined as lesser types (type number B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A". In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time reduction A) and 50 times (time reduction B) for the number of time reductions due to the jackpot. It is configured to give only the type (for example, 100 times of time saving). As long as the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied, the support time reduction may be given a time reduction number (for example, 150 times) different from the time reduction number due to the big hit. In addition, two or more types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to support time reduction may be provided (in this case, the relationship is "2 ≤ number of types B <number of types A").

(Limited time saving form Ω2)
When the average number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is M, the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) can be satisfied.
(Equation 1) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N <average number of time reductions M". In the case of the present embodiment, the average number of time reductions N due to the jackpot is 75 times, so the average number of time reductions M due to the support time reduction is set to a larger number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or more). In this case, since the profit margin is higher in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction than in the time-saving state due to the big hit, it can be a nice support privilege for the player who is in the middle of the game. The average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number.
(Equation 2) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N = average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time saving state due to the big hit and the time saving state due to the support time saving have the same degree of profit. It should be noted that "infinite time reduction" may be included in both the time reduction state due to the time reduction jackpot and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction. In this case as well, "average time saving number N (infinite number of times) = average time saving number M (infinite number of times)", and the above (Equation 2) is satisfied.
(Equation 3) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average time reduction N> average time reduction M". In this case, since the profit margin is relatively lower in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction than in the time-saving state due to the big hit, it is possible to maintain the position as a "support privilege" in which the support time reduction does not give an excessive benefit. .. In addition, "infinite time reduction" may be included in the time reduction state due to the time reduction jackpot, and in this case, "infinite time reduction" is not included in the time reduction state due to the support time reduction.

(Limited time saving form Ω3)
(4) As in (Equation 3) above, paying attention to the point of preventing excessive privilege granting, at least the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship of "number of time reductions due to support time reduction ≤ maximum number of time reductions due to big hits" Determine. In this example, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is less than or equal to the number of time reductions (100 times) of "time reduction A" due to the time reduction jackpot 1, for example, 100 times or 90 times. In addition, when multiple support time reductions are provided, paying attention to the minimum time reduction number due to the big hit, even if the time reduction number satisfies the relationship of "minimum time reduction number due to the big hit ≤ time reduction number due to the support time reduction <maximum time reduction number due to the big hit". Good. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is equal to or more than the time reduction number of "time reduction B" by the time reduction jackpot 2 (50 times) and less than the time reduction number of "time reduction A" by the time reduction jackpot 1 (100 times), for example. 50 times, 60 times, etc. The time saving state due to the time saving jackpot may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to the support time saving does not include "infinite time saving". Further, the minimum number of time reductions due to the big hit may be 100 times or more, and the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction may be 100 times or more as long as the above (Equation 3) is satisfied.

(Limited time saving form Ω4)
Regarding the time saving jackpot or the support time saving, it is possible to give a larger number of time saving times than the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability. In addition, the same or substantially the same number of time reductions as the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability can be given. If the probability denominator is not a natural number, the value with the decimal point rounded down may be used as the number of time reductions. If the probability denominator is less than 100, "tens digit value x 10" may be adopted, and if it is less than 1000, "hundreds digit value x 100" may be adopted as the number of time reductions. By adopting the same or substantially the same value as the probability denominator or an approximate value, it is possible to generate an appropriate number of consecutive villas during the time saving state due to the shortened support time (the rate of consecutive villas can be about 64%).

(Game mode related to latent state)
In addition, when providing the latent probability state, the data value different from Tcode and YJ (see FIG. 43) corresponding to other gaming states may be set. As a result, the "latent probability mode" and the "latent probability effect mode" may be provided as the game mode and the effect mode. The probabilistic mode according to the present embodiment has been described as a game mode corresponding to the "probability change state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or part of the probabilistic change mode is defined as a game mode corresponding to the "latent state". It can also be handled. In addition, the fluctuating state under the latent mode (latent state) is the same as or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least a fluctuating state slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuating state in which the average digestion time is relatively long). Is preferable.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 15>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 9) and are mainly configured.

<12. Main control side main processing: Fig. 8>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side.

When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exerted and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not the setting value can be changed in the setting change mode transition state (step S014). In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on when the power to the game machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (the door open sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on while the operation is performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied and the setting value can be changed. It is controlled to (setting change mode transition state).

In the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, is the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM in the area an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6)? Judge whether or not. If it is a normal game operation, the set value data (set value Nc) of any one of "00H to 05H (normal value)" is stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. However, there is a possibility that the set value data is damaged due to some trouble and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set (setting error). Therefore, when the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If it is returned to the initial value or is a normal value, the current set value is displayed on the setting display 97. After that, the ON / OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As for the setting value during the setting change (during the setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting changes in the range of settings 1 to 6 and the setting is changed to the setting display 97. The current setting value in is displayed. Then, when the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the set value is confirmed, and the current set value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. As a result, the setting change process is exited. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-region RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

The RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any of the setting values 1 to 6 can be selected and configured. Further, the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine the presence or absence of the abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it checks whether the set value data (set value Nc) in the set value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, and the like. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), the power re-on wait process (step S020) related to the RAM abnormality described later is executed.

When there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF has a BF flag storage area of the RAM in the area of "5AH (normal value)" when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. Is set to. Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠ 5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In the power restart waiting process in step S020, the game is controlled to the game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending the power re-on command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clear process that clears the WDT and the confirmation of the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal (confirmation of the power failure) until a power failure occurs. The process (power supply error check process) is repeated. When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until the power failure is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, as a RAM error notification (power re-on instruction effect), the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that "RAM error power is turned on again and the set value is set to 1. , Etc. are displayed, all the effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

When the power re-turning wait process is executed and the game is stopped, the power of the game machine 1 is turned on again, and when the power is turned on again, the operation is set so that the setting change mode transition state is set. Unless the change process (step S023) is executed, the RAM error state currently occurring cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the set value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting error error), the in-area RAM clear process of step S031 described later is executed. As a result, substantially the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (out-of-area RAM area) is excluded) is cleared, so that the RAM 203 returns to the initial state and the RAM error is eliminated. ing.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (the setting key switch signal is turned off). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power to the game machine 1 is turned on, it is controlled to the RAM clear mode transition state on the assumption that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied.

When the RAM clear mode transition state is set (step S025: YES), the in-region RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display and the in-area RAM area other than the set value storage area in the storage area of the RAM 203 are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" as the effect mode in the initial state. That is, when the in-area RAM clear processing is executed, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the effect mode is also the normal effect mode (for example, normal (normal A effect mode)) and simple (normal) related to the normal mode. It will be set to either B production mode) or premium mode (normal C production mode).

After completing the in-area RAM clearing process in step S031, the initial setting process at the time of RAM clearing (initial data setting process at power-on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmitting the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special diagram 1 stop symbol, Special figure 2 Stop symbol) Loss symbol data is set as data. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if the RAM clear mode transition state is not performed (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state). (Step S026). In the case of the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode transition state is controlled as if the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied (see steps S014 to S026).

When the setting confirmation mode is in the transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the process continues. Then, the backup restoration process (step S028) for restoring the game processing from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of the set value is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. Then, after the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the game machine 1, the backup restoration process (step S028) is performed, and the game at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), intra-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC setting The process is executed (step S036). Here, the CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt is executed periodically every 4 ms. As a result, after that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state), and the game is played. The start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S037). As a result, the launching motion of the game ball from the launching device 32 is allowed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, the initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory is executed. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

It should be noted that it is necessary to execute the operation of confirming whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally in the step before executing the CTC setting process of step S036 after executing the backup restoration process of step S028. The "operation check setting process" may be configured to be executable. In the confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated "all blinking" for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Control in the "display (operation confirmation display)" mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display process related to the operation check is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102: out-of-area program) during the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance display 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the setting change process (step S023). ) And the setting confirmation process (step S027), the display of the base value by the performance display 99 is not executed at this stage. Utilizing this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 is configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 is temporarily used as the setting indicator 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, since the setting display 97 can be replaced with the performance display 99, it is possible to contribute to reduction of control load and cost reduction.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregation division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor aggregation division processing in step S043 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed thereafter (main loop processing). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 9>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF ← 5AH) and the checksum value. Checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the RAM in the area), backup processing including storage of the calculation result, and the like are performed. The power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, a winning counter for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on the input information (detection information) of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1. (Input data creation process). Further, here, input data is also created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error processing according to the status abnormality is performed in the error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data and a setting error occurs. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, the setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the setting abnormality check process. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect control means is used to execute the setting error error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when this setting error check process is executed again, the process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 addition for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In this case, an error command capable of specifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is cleared, an error clearing command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to execute the error clearing process.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and executes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, the processing required for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation) is executed. Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (Public figure random number acquisition process), and hold and store the game information as hold data (Public figure operation hold ball) up to the maximum number of hold storage numbers (4 in this case) (Public figure hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop symbol). To determine. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the general electric open game is executed based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned auxiliary hit lottery. Specifically, solenoid control data is generated and set for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, and the operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled. Will be done.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, the process required for the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, mainly, the holding memory for the special figure operation holding ball, the look-ahead judgment, the determination of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern based on the look-ahead judgment result, the jackpot lottery, the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation based on the jackpot lottery, special Performs processing related to determining the stop symbol, controlling the variable display operation of the special symbol, and setting the transition of the game state. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, a process required for a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. The special electric accessory management process mainly performs processing related to execution control of the winning game based on the big hit lottery result, setting of the transition destination game state after the big hit game, and the like. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, in a state with electric support (time saving state or probable change state)). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is executed for various LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, and a right-handed display device 39b. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created, and output control is executed for the external device through the external terminal board 21 for the frame.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094) is applied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the lower starting port 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all the registers are saved (step S101), the performance display monitoring process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all the registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing related to calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed. In addition, here, the type test signal is created and output processing is also performed.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is completed and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<8. Special symbol management process: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special figure 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special figure 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the start port check processing in steps S301 to S302, the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag. When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is ON, that is, during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the special symbol display in step S309 is performed as it is without performing the processing related to the variation display of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308. Proceed to data update processing. Therefore, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed during the big hit game. In other words, during the hit game, the special symbol corresponding to the hit is held in the special symbol display device while being stopped and displayed (confirmed).

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress (step S304: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). ) Is performed. The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. The process according to any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has been changed and stopped (confirmed) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the fluctuation display operation of the special symbol (display operation in which the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop are set) is realized. Details of steps S306 to S308, which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12, 13, and 14A to 14B, respectively.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ) Is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variation display and stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. As a result, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 9 is executed.

<9. Special figure 1 Starting port check process: Fig. 11>
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading judgment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start port check process will be focused on.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (starting port on the special drawing 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation in FIG. 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special Figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating the over-winning (for example, in the special figure 1). In this case, B406H, in the case of special drawing 2, B506H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the number of balls held in special figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of balls held in special figure 1 (step S313), and step S314 is performed. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are specially illustrated in this hold storage area. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). In the above-mentioned reserved storage area, the reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (the special figure 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reserved corresponding to the special figure 2). A storage area) is provided, and each can store hold data for the maximum number of hold balls.

Next, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command (step S315), and then, It is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting pre-reading determination, specifically, a condition for prohibiting pre-reading notice. When the special figure 1 start port check process is in progress, the look-ahead prohibition condition for the special figure 1 operation hold ball is in effect, and in the special figure 2 start port check process, the look-ahead for the special figure 2 operation hold ball is in progress. Determine whether the prohibition condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the current game state is a game state (time saving state or probability change state) accompanied by a state with electric support, that is, a game state in which a special figure 2 operation holding ball is likely to occur,'special figure 1 look-ahead prohibited. In the case of "a game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)", that is, in a game state in which a special figure 1 operation holding ball is likely to occur, "special figure 2 look-ahead is prohibited". It is said. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probability change state, it is assumed that the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is being satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”. It should be noted that which of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is prohibited from pre-reading can be determined according to the internal gaming state (game state determination number YJ) and / or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 read-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the read-ahead determination process (steps S318 to S320) are skipped, and the process of step S321 described later is skipped. Proceed to. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation pending ball this time is not executed, and a winning command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (starting opening winning, which will be described later). Time random number determination process (see step S320)). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice of the current operation hold ball is controlled to the prohibited state (the look-ahead notice for the current operation hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the read-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) is skipped, and step S321 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball this time is not executed, and the winning command with the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) have not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted and the random number determination process is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. Random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12) ”is determined in advance.

(Set value command)
The above "setting value command" is used when the effect control unit 24 side includes information that can identify the current set value and controls the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Will be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead advance notice effect) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, the "hit random number determination table" is acquired, and then the big hit determination random number value is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the operation pending ball this time is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

(T-1. Random number judgment table: Fig. 20)
FIG. 20 shows an example of a hit random number determination table according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 (A) shows the case where the support time reduction is provided on the special figure 2 side, and FIG. 20 (B) shows the case where the support time reduction is not provided on the special figure 2 side (since the lottery probability is 0, it is substantially provided. It shows the hit random number judgment table (including the case equivalent to the one not given). In addition, the "support time reduction" of this embodiment is defined as the target of the winning lottery. From this point of view, the lottery form related to the support time reduction is referred to as the "winning lottery target lottery form".

The hit random number judgment table includes a hit random number judgment table (a hit random number judgment table for special figure 1) targeting a special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and a special figure 2 action hold ball (special). A hit random number determination table (a hit random number determination table for special figure 2) corresponding to the symbol variation display game 2) is provided. That is, the "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability and low probability), the winning type (big hit, support time reduction, loss (may include small hit)) is determined. The judgment area (judgment value) and the big hit judgment random number value (size of big hit judgment random number: 65536) are defined in association with each other, and depending on which judgment value the big hit judgment random number value belongs to. The winning type is decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the jackpot lottery probability differs depending on the settings 1 to 6). (In the figure, the determination values of settings 1, 3 and 6 are typically shown). Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/180, high probability 1/45", setting 5 "low probability 1/184, high probability 1/46", ..., Setting 2 "low probability 1 / With 196, high probability 1/49 "and setting 1" low probability 1/200, high probability 1/50 ", the jackpot is won. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

FIG. 20B is a random number determination table for special figure 2 when the support time reduction is not provided on the special figure 2 side, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the determination value (65405 to 65535) of the support time reduction winning. All the data of the part to be processed is "00H". That is, even if the big hit determination random number value belongs to "65405 to 65535", the winning result is forcibly "missed". In this way, if it is desired to provide a support time reduction on the special figure 2 side later, it is only necessary to change the data corresponding to the judgment value to "5AH", and the data structure is changed as a whole again. There is no need, and adjustments can be facilitated during new model development and design development stages.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'for determining the lottery (step S411 in FIG. 10 described later) in advance is performed.

In the special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table" is selected according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ..

(T-2. Design table selection table: Fig. 21)
The selection of the symbol table is determined based on the "symbol table selection table" shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the symbol table selection table includes the symbol table selection table corresponding to each of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (design table selection table for special figure 1, symbol table selection for special symbol 2). A table) is provided. For example, if the change this time is on the special figure 1 side and the result of the winning lottery is "support time reduction", "support time reduction symbol table 1" is selected. It should be noted that these symbol table selection tables are also used when selecting the symbol table at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the above-mentioned "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "support time reduction symbol table", and a "loss symbol table" for determining a jackpot type, a support time reduction type, and a loss type. , Each symbol table is provided according to the special symbol type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later. In addition, in FIG. 21 (a) and (b), when the winning lottery target on the special figure 2 side has a support time reduction, in FIGS. 21 (b) and (c), there is no "support time reduction" in the winning lottery target on the special figure 2 side. The design table selection table of the case is shown. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small hit is not provided, the "small hit symbol table" is not provided.

Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. (Symbol judgment) is executed, and the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result) is acquired.

(T-3. Design table: FIGS. 22 to 24)
22 to 24 show the above-mentioned "big hit symbol table", "support time saving symbol table", and "missing symbol table". As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the symbol table has a determination area (judgment value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and a random value for special symbol determination (for example, a random value for determining special symbol). The size: 200) is associated with the definition. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to, and as data indicating the lottery result, the special symbol determination data special stop symbol The number and the offset value for selecting the fluctuation pattern (offset value in the figure) are acquired. In the present embodiment, according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, refer to the column of "symbol lottery rate" in FIG. 4), the winning type (winning type: jackpot type (10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot) ), Support time reduction type (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C)) are determined.

The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying the winning type, and specifically, the hit type (10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot) and the support time reduction type (support time reduction). This is data for identifying which of A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C) was won. The special symbol determination data includes processing that requires winning type information (for example, game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12, which will be described later, special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413), and execution of a jackpot game. It is used in a process related to control (special electric accessory management process in FIG. 15).

Further, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side ('7 in this embodiment). It is used when specifying the display mode of seg'. In the present embodiment, for example, even if the winning types are the same, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b depending on the determination value (in the present embodiment, the display mode of '7 segment'). ) May be different. In this way, even if the winning types are the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is viewed by determining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the random value for determining the special symbol. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish what kind of jackpot or support time reduction the player has won. As for the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number are provided in the same manner as the special symbol.

The above-mentioned "offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern" is data used for selecting a target fluctuation pattern distribution table.

In the illustration, for convenience of explanation, the value of the special symbol determination data special stop symbol number and the offset value for variable pattern selection is described as "** H", but here, it is appropriate corresponding to each winning type. The value is set.

(About other big hit lottery forms)
In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of "support time saving (time saving symbol)" for giving a time saving state are provided to the target of the "winning lottery" using the big hit judgment random number, and the winning lottery result and the special symbol judgment are provided. It is a lottery form in which one "support time reduction" is drawn by a "design lottery" that uses a random number value (a lottery form for winning lottery). Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area (winning area) related to the support time reduction is provided in the hit random number determination table, and the “support time reduction symbol table” shown in FIG. 23 is provided as the symbol table. In the case of the winning lottery target lottery form, since the big hit and the support time reduction are drawn independently, the lottery probability of the support time reduction does not change even if the lottery probability of the big hit fluctuates (see FIG. 20).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lottery forms can be used. Specifically, the following "hit type target lottery form (FIG. 25)" and "loss type target lottery form (FIG. 29)" may be used.

(“Lottery form for winning type”: Fig. 25)
As shown in FIG. 25, the "winning type target lottery form" is a lottery form in which a support time reduction is provided for the hit type (winning type belonging to a big hit or a small hit) and the support time reduction is treated as a winning type belonging to the "win". is there. Specifically, it is a case where one or a plurality of types of determination areas related to support time reduction are provided in the big hit symbol table or the small hit symbol table (see FIG. 28). One or more types of support time reductions can be provided for the hit type on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side. Here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the description will be focused on the special figure 1 side, and the description will be omitted for the special figure 2 side. In addition, the details of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery, which are substantially the same as the contents already explained, will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In this winning type target lottery form, first, either "big hit" or "missing" is determined by the winning lottery. This winning lottery is performed based on the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the big hit determination random number. As shown in the figure, the winning random number determination table of this example is not provided with a winning area for shortening the support time.

Next, a symbol table is selected based on the result of the winning lottery. In this example, the symbol table selection table shown in FIG. 27 is referred to, and the symbol table corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is selected. In this example, since the support time reduction is included in the hit type, the "support time reduction symbol table" as in the above embodiment is not provided, and the "big hit symbol tables 1 and 2" for the jackpot winning are lost. "Loss pattern tables 1 and 2" for time are provided.

Then, by the symbol lottery, the winning type belonging to the jackpot, for example, in the case of the special figure 1 side, one of the winning types (symbol type) from "10 probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot, support time reduction A to C" ) Is determined. This symbol lottery is performed based on the symbol table and the random value for determining the special symbol. FIG. 28 shows a jackpot symbol table according to this example (the lost symbol table is the same as FIG. 24, so the illustration is omitted). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 28.

In the case of the winning type target lottery form, since the support time reduction belongs to the big hit type, the winning probability depends on the big hit lottery probability. That is, when the probability is high (for example, the probability change state), the lottery probability of the support time reduction also increases (support time reduction probability fluctuation state). For example, if the jackpot winning probability state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state), the lottery probability (settings 1 to 6) of the support time saving is about 1/1333 to 1/1200, but when the probability is high (normal state, time saving state). In the probabilistic state and latent state), the lottery probability of shortening the support time also increases, and becomes about 1/333 to 1/300 (the same increase as the jackpot lottery probability).

("Loss type target lottery form" (variation example 2 of the lottery form): FIG. 29)
Next, the "lost type target lottery form" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29, the “loss type target lottery form” is a lottery form in which a support time reduction is provided for the loss type and the support time reduction is treated as a winning type belonging to “loss”. Specifically, this is a case in which one or a plurality of types of determination areas related to support time reduction are provided in the lost symbol table (see FIG. 30). One or more types of support time reductions can be provided for the hit type on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side.

This loss type target lottery form treats the support time reduction as one aspect of "loss", which is largely different from the case where the support time reduction is treated as one aspect of "hit" as in the above-mentioned "winning type target lottery form". different. However, the content of the lottery processing procedure itself is substantially the same.

In this loss type target lottery form, first, either "big hit" or "loss" is determined by the winning lottery. This winning lottery is performed based on the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the big hit determination random number.

If "Loss" is drawn by the winning lottery, the winning type belonging to the loss, for example, "Loss A to C and support time reduction A to C" if it is the special figure 1 side, is selected by the symbol lottery. (Symbol type) is decided. Which of the winning types is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29. FIG. 30 shows a lost symbol table according to this example (the jackpot symbol table is omitted because it is the same as FIG. 22 of the above embodiment (lottery target lottery form)). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29.

However, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type, when the size of the special symbol determination random number (numerical range that the random number can take) is small, for example, the size of the special symbol determination random number is 200 (0 to 199). In this case, the winning probability of the support time reduction can be reduced to only 1/200 of the lost winning probability, and the degree of freedom in adjusting the winning probability of the support time reduction is lacking.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in the figure, the size of the special symbol determination random number is set to 16384 (0 to 16383), and the adjustment range of the winning probability of the support time reduction is given a degree of freedom. Here, the relationship is "the size of the special symbol determination random number used for the jackpot symbol lottery (200) <the size of the special symbol determination random number used for the lost symbol lottery (5000)". Of course, depending on the playability, the special symbol determination random number used for the jackpot symbol lottery may also be used for the lost symbol lottery.

In the case of the above-mentioned lottery form for the loss type, since the support time reduction belongs to the loss type, the winning probability depends on the loss lottery probability. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery probability becomes high, the lottery probability of losing is lowered by that amount, and therefore, contrary to the case of the above-mentioned hit type target lottery form, the lottery probability of shortening the support time is lowered. For example, if the winning probability state of the jackpot is low, the lottery probability of the support time reduction (settings 1 to 6) is about 1/500, but if the probability is high, the lottery probability of the support time reduction decreases, and it is about. The probability is lower than 1/500.

The feature of the lottery form for the loss type is that the privilege can be obtained even though it is "loss". For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the loss variation pattern distribution table may include a variation pattern distribution table related to the support time reduction winning (a configuration in which the variation pattern related to the support time reduction winning can be selected). The part omitted by "..." has the same contents as the normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 according to the present embodiment, and is omitted for convenience of explanation. .. Similarly, the other loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FIGS. 34, 36, 38, 40, etc.) can be configured so that the variation pattern related to the support time reduction winning can be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the support time is shortened, the reach variation is selected as in the case of winning. However, for the fluctuation pattern specification command, the command data belonging to the loss is selected. This is because the support time reduction belongs to the loss. As a result, in terms of production, during the symbol variation display game, the same advance notice production (production according to the loss production scenario) as at the time of loss appears, but in the end, the effect of "winning in a short support time" is unexpected. Can be revealed. In addition, at the final stage of the reach effect, in the winning effect that notifies whether or not it is a hit, the same winning effect (successful effect) as at the time of winning the big hit may appear despite the loss. In addition, the production mode may be different from that at the time of winning the big hit.

Which of the "winning type target lottery form (FIG. 25)" and "missing type target lottery form (FIG. 29)" and the "winning lottery target lottery form (FIG. 4)" according to the above modification It is free to adopt the lottery form of the above, but it is preferable to adopt the “winning lottery target lottery form (FIG. 4)”, and more preferably the “loss type target lottery form (FIG. 29)”. The reason is that in the case of the "winning type target lottery form (Fig. 25)", the support time reduction is treated as belonging to the winning type, so if it belongs to the big hit type, "the big hit will be won by the winning lottery". This becomes a condition for winning the support time reduction, and gives the player a sense of loss (for example, a disappointing feeling that "I won the support time reduction with a low profit margin even though I was drawing a big hit"). Is.

In any of the lottery forms, if there is only one type of support time reduction, it is not necessary to execute the symbol lottery. In addition, among the big hit lottery related to a plurality of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2), a time saving state is given based on the big hit lottery related to a specific special symbol (either special figure 1 or special figure 2). It may be configured as. For example, among the special figures 1 and 2, the "support time reduction" can be provided only for the lottery target of the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side.

Further, although a common symbol table may be provided for all the settings, a symbol table according to the set value may be provided. For example, it can be configured as follows (A) and (B).
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or more winning types is different in a part or all of each set value. For example, the symbol lottery rate for a specific probability variation jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (probability variation jackpot and / or latent probability jackpot)) is different in all or a part of each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the probability variation inrush rate is set to 65% common to all settings (see the symbol lottery probability of 10R probability variation jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot in FIG. 4), but the probability variation inrush rate of settings 1 to 6 is set to, for example. It can be determined that the higher the set value, the higher the probability (easier to enter the probability change), such as "60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%". The same applies to the time saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate for time saving jackpots).
In any case, as the set value becomes higher, the ball ejection performance (machine discount) may be determined to be more advantageous to the player.

Returning to the description of FIG. After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number judgment process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead judgment'process, and here, the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" when the operation hold ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is described. Performs'look-ahead fluctuation pattern judgment'to be judged in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, for the pre-reading symbol determination result (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314. Using a random number (magnitude of random number value: 10000), the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the operation hold ball this time is pre-read and determined. Since the look-ahead pattern judgment determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, a separately provided "look-ahead judgment table" having the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Refer to. However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, a fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided as "at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading judgment) and at the time of fluctuation start" (MODE1 in FIGS. 31 and 32, etc.). , MODE2, EVENT), at both the time of winning and the time of the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is pre-read based on this fluctuation pattern distribution table and the random value for the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314. judge.

Then, "command data at the time of winning" is acquired as the look-ahead determination result. Here, as the command data constituting the winning command, the command data on the "MODE1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be specified. "The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired. That is, the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding the operation pending ball number information) is based on the command data determined in the start opening winning random number determination process. ) Will be specified.

Regarding the above-mentioned "starting port winning random number determination process (step S320)", in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 32 is typically used to win a prize (look-ahead). Not only the content at the time of determination (at the time of determination), but also the content at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process of FIG. 12 (step S413)) will be described.

The start port winning random number determination process is configured to include the following processes (a) and (b) as a process for determining a "winning command" for designating a look-ahead variation pattern.
(A) Refer to the "variable pattern distribution table selection table (not shown)" for selecting the variable pattern distribution table, and determine the "variable pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time. Sorting table determination process ",
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (a) above, the winning command data corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern random number value acquired in the process of step S314. It is configured to include "command data determination process at the time of winning (look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process)".

(Variable pattern distribution table selection table (at the time of winning): not shown)
In the above "variable pattern distribution table selection table", there are a plurality of types of "variable pattern distribution tables" associated with the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of balls on hold, and the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). It is set. The variable pattern distribution table selection table includes a plurality of types of variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to 7) based on a special symbol type, a winning type, the number of balls on hold, and a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). Any one of the "variable pattern distribution tables" can be determined.

This fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table is not only used when determining the "winning command" at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment), but also processing related to the determination of the "variation pattern specification command" at the start of fluctuation ( It is also used in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) of FIG. 12, which will be described later, and serves as a variation pattern distribution table selection table that is shared (common) at the time of winning and at the start of variation. However, at the time of pre-reading determination (the above-mentioned "winning fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process"), the number of operation-holding balls is ignored (with the operation-holding balls set to zero), and the purpose is obtained from the above-mentioned variation pattern distribution table selection table. The fluctuation pattern distribution table of is selected (this will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, a value obtained by subtracting the number of operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation from the existing operation-holding balls (operation-holding ball number-1) is referred to as information on the number of operation-holding balls (FIG. 32). In the column of "number of balls on hold" in the above, see steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol change start processing of FIG.

(Variable pattern distribution table (at the time of winning))
Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern distribution table will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table according to normal in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described as a representative example. FIG. 31 shows a “normal middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table” that is referred to at the time of big hit or support time reduction winning in the normal mode (normal state), and FIG. 32 is referenced at the time of loss in the normal mode. The "normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" is shown.

With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution tables related to the normal mode include the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FB1 to FB6” for winning and the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1 to FH7” for loss. And are included. These fluctuation pattern distribution tables are provided as tables for both pre-reading determination and fluctuation start. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table.

(B) In the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE1” in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for constructing the “winning command” that specifies the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte (the figure) The command data on the (second byte) side (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern (magnitude of the random value for the fluctuation pattern: 10000) are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE1" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "Event" is command data that can specify the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. At the time of pre-reading judgment, this fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and a winning command is configured depending on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to (lottery using the fluctuation pattern random value). Command data is determined. As a result, a winning command is created and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is specified. When this winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and uses it for the effect process related to the look-ahead notice.

(B) In addition, the fluctuation pattern distribution table also defines data related to the "variation pattern specification command" that specifies the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE2” on the upper byte (first byte) side) for configuring the fluctuation pattern specification command and the lower byte (second byte) side. Command data (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE2" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "Event" is command data that can specify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referred to at the start of fluctuation (see the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) of FIG. 12 described later), and the fluctuation pattern specification command is configured by lottery using the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The command data to be used is determined. As a result, a fluctuation pattern specification command (upper byte MODE2 + lower byte EVENT) is created, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified. The "variation pattern specification command" is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of "MODE2" and "event", like the winning command, and when this variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, , The effect control unit 24 side grasps the variation pattern at the start of the variation, and is used for the effect processing related to the effect during the symbol variation.

Although the "selectivity" is shown here in the figure, in reality, the judgment area (judgment value: 0 to 0) for determining the winning command data or the fluctuation pattern specification command according to the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The range of 9999) is defined, and these command data are determined depending on which determination value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random value for the fluctuation pattern and the judgment value is as follows. For example, if the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1” shown in FIG. 32 is described as a representative example, the judgment value is referred to from the place where the judgment value is first described when viewed from the front of the drawing in the column direction from the top to the bottom. Although it is described in the order of "10", "8990", and "1000", the content is that the random value for the fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is in the range of the determination value 0 to 9 (in the above "10"). If it belongs to the description column), the command data that specifies "normal fluctuation 13s" is selected, and if it belongs to the range of judgment values 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the description column of "8990" above), "normal fluctuation 16s" The command data that specifies "N reach 1" is selected when the command data that specifies "N reach 1" is selected and belongs to the range of the judgment value 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the description field of "1000" above). .. In the case of the present embodiment, the blank portion in the figure, that is, the address where the determination value is stored, does not mean that the determination value data is not stored, but "0" is stored as the determination value. This is to facilitate the adjustment of the selectivity when developing a new model or at the design development stage.

To explain this by taking a simple example, for example, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the determination values are distributed to the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1, but tentatively, the normal fluctuation If it is desired to additionally select 8s, it becomes necessary to change the data structure as a whole again, which may result in a situation where the design is restarted from scratch. Further, although not shown, when a fluctuation pattern distribution table for each set value is provided, it may be necessary to change the data structure of all these tables. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set, and the design is performed while adjusting the judgment values in consideration of the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of production such as reach production. I will go. Therefore, the design may be designed based on the initially set judgment value, or may need to be changed.

Therefore, "0 (zero)" is provisionally set as the judgment value data for the address of the storage destination of the judgment value of the fluctuation pattern that is considered to be out of the selection target at the design stage, and if a change occurs, that value is appropriately set. Is changed so that it can be easily included in the fluctuation pattern to be selected. For example, in the judgment value data of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the normal fluctuation 4s "0", the normal fluctuation 8s "0", the normal fluctuation 13s "10", the normal fluctuation 16s "8990", Data including zeros (blank parts in the figure) such as normal fluctuation 16s "0" for pre-reading notice, N reach 1 "0" for pre-reading notice, and N reach 1 "1000" are stored.

In the case of this embodiment, when the loss A is won, as shown in the figure, N reach 2 and later are defined as fluctuation patterns that are not to be selected. Therefore, in each of "FH1" to "FH4", normal fluctuations 4s to N Judgment value data including "0" is stored within the address range related to reach 1 (consecutive addresses in this case) (of course, the selection target may be the fluctuation pattern after N reach 2). Even when the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (the process of determining the look-ahead variation pattern and the process of determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation) is executed, but the variation pattern with the determination value of zero is actually selected. Since it is not performed, it can be registered as a "variation pattern that is not used". This "judgment value zero" part can be changed from "unused fluctuation pattern" to "selection target fluctuation pattern" by setting a value other than zero as appropriate when adjustment is required at the design stage or the like. , Easy to change. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, if the judgment value is left at zero and the same address allocation as the address allocation at the development stage is used when developing a new model, the table data structure can be changed one by one. There is no need to change, and design changes are extremely easy. The same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables.

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data constituting the "winning command" is determined at the time of winning depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to, and at the time of starting the fluctuation. The command data that composes the "variation pattern specification command" is determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the target fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected by ignoring the number of operation-holding balls (assuming the operation-holding balls are zero) at the time of pre-reading determination, and the reason will be described below. It's a street.

The fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 32 is a table for both winning and starting fluctuation (the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables), but in reality, the number of balls on hold at the time of winning and the start of fluctuation It does not always match the number of pending operations. Therefore, at the time of pre-reading determination (at the time of winning), the operation holding ball is set to zero, and the target fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected. For example, referring to FIG. 32, when the current game state is normal (Tcode = 00H), the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is loss A (special). (Fig. 1 side loss A winning), the variable pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold at the time of winning.

However, even if the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination and the number of operation hold balls at the start of fluctuation do not match, the look-ahead variation pattern is determined by ignoring the number of operation hold balls in the dark cloud. There is a possibility that there will be a big difference between the content of and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. More specifically, at the time of winning, the main control unit 20 sends a "winning command" including the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command is based on the hold addition command. , Performs production control related to pre-reading notice production. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, the main control unit 20 sends a “variation pattern designation command” including fluctuation pattern information at the start of fluctuation to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 that receives this sends the fluctuation pattern specification command. Based on the above, the effect control including the variation display operation effect of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol variation display effect (decorative symbol effect described later)) and the advance notice effect (notice effect during change) in the decorative symbol variation display game is performed. Due to such a relationship, if there is a large difference between the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the relationship between the content of the look-ahead notice and the content of the notice during change is broken, and the reliability of the notice production There is a risk that the fun will be reduced and the player's willingness to play will be diminished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead determination is provided with the following characteristic element (first characteristic element).

(First characteristic element)
For example, when the current game state is normal, the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is the loss A (special figure 1 side loss A), as described above. At the time of pre-reading determination, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of balls on hold (the column of "00H (normal), special figure 1, loss A" in FIG. 32). reference).

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH3 to FH4", "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s" and the like belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type can be selected (normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s) and the like (normal fluctuation pattern). Although it can be determined), these are defined as "variable pattern types for non-pre-reading notice" in which the pre-reading notice is not executed. This non-look-ahead notice variation pattern is specifically a look-ahead fluctuation pattern of "not subject to the look-ahead notice lottery" or "a target of the look-ahead notice lottery, but the winning probability is zero (pre-reading notice is not executed)". is there. In the case of this embodiment, among the normal fluctuation types, the target of the look-ahead notice is only the “normal change for look-ahead notice 16s” that can be selected in the case of the loss B (see FH5).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in addition to "normal fluctuation 13s and normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the normal fluctuation type, N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type can be selected. Here, the mere "N reach 1" is different from the pre-reading notice N reach 1 and belongs to the non-look-ahead notice variation pattern. Therefore, when the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal state is won, the fluctuation pattern (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is set at the time of winning (“FH1” is selected at the time of pre-reading judgment). Never selected. That is, there is a case where a variation pattern of a different system is determined at the time of winning and at the start of variation, for example, a case where it is determined to be N reach 1 at the time of pre-reading determination and a case where it is determined to be normal variation at the start of variation. However, in the case of the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal case, since the pre-reading notice does not appear, no particular problem occurs. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the pre-reading notice not appear at all, and a problem arises if the pre-reading notice rarely appears when the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s or the N reach 1 is selected. It is considered that there is no such thing. For example, at least one of the fluctuation patterns of the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1 can be used as the look-ahead advance notice fluctuation pattern. Preferably, the selectivity is "normal variation 13s" and / or "N reach" with a relatively low probability, and more preferably, "normal variation 13s" having the lowest selectivity. However, in this case, in order to prevent the look-ahead notice from appearing excessively, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice (probability of winning the look-ahead lottery) is higher than that of "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and / or "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". Is preferably set to a low probability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the normal case, when the special figure 1 side loss B (normal medium special figure 1 side loss B) is won, or the special figure 1 side loss C (normal medium special figure 1 side loss C). ), Or if you win the loss A on the special figure 2 side (normally the loss on the special figure 2 side), both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation are common regardless of the number of balls on hold. The loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5", "FH6", and "FH7 (common to all losses)" are selected. That is, in the case of pre-reading determination at the time of winning the normal medium special figure 1 side loss B, the normal medium special figure 1 side loss C, and the special figure 2 side loss A, the number of balls on hold for each operation at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation. Since the common fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to in the above, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be accurately pre-read and determined.

(About the second characteristic element)
Generally, even in the state without electric support, the number of balls on hold may change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short time. If this is used to configure a variable pattern that can be selected according to the number of pending balls, the effect time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) will change for each symbol variation display game, resulting in a variety of effects. Can be generated. In particular, if the average execution time (symbol variation time) of one symbol variation display game at the time of loss is set to a short time (for example, about several seconds), the so-called "variable slump (symbol variation display game is not executed)". The rate of occurrence of "period)" increases, and it becomes easier for the player to feel that "it does not turn or is not interesting", the interest in the game declines, and the repeat rate of the game decreases. Therefore, it is considered that if the average execution time of one symbol variation display game is lengthened, the operation holding balls can be easily accumulated and the occurrence rate of the variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is set to a long time indiscriminately, the progress speed of the game slows down, the production during the fluctuation of the angle becomes a sloppy production, and the tension for winning the big hit due to the advance notice production is interrupted. This gives the player a feeling of boredom and dissatisfaction. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is unnecessarily long, overflow of the operation hold ball (starting prize exceeding the maximum hold memory number (4 pieces)) is likely to occur, that is, the execution right of the game There is a risk that much will be lost and the player's willingness to play will decline. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time. For example, a variation pattern selection technique that takes into consideration the number of pending balls at the start of variation and the gaming state is important. In particular, in the progress of the game, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that focuses on the loss that many players encounter.

In view of such a problem, in the present embodiment, the “loss variation pattern distribution table” of FIG. 32 has a characteristic configuration. Hereinafter, the details will be described with a focus on the “loss variation pattern distribution table“ FH1 to FH7 ”” that is selected when the loss is won.

<A. Characteristics of the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the normal loss winning
In the present embodiment, the loss types include a plurality of types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C. (See Fig. 4 Remarks column). Here, as shown in FIG. 32, when the special figure 1 side loss A is won, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of balls on hold. However, if the special figure 1 side loss B is won, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected regardless of the number of operation hold balls, and even if the special figure 1 side loss C is won, the number of operation hold balls Regardless, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected. In addition, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold even when the loss on the special figure 2 side is won.

These fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FH1 to FH7) related to the normal middle loss winning have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table selected regardless of the number of pending balls is also referred to as a “common fluctuation pattern distribution table”.

(A-1. Fluctuation pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of pending numbers) "FH1 to FH4") related to the special figure 1 side normal middle loss A winning
(Α) Loss fluctuation pattern Each of the distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" has at least "a plurality of types of normal fluctuations can be selected". Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, there is a possibility that normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 (variation time 26s) is selected, and when "FH2" is selected. May be selected for normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1. Further, when "FH3" is selected, normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s may be selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s is selected. There is a possibility. The normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types, and the normal fluctuation 4s has the shortest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest)". It belongs to "normal fluctuation pattern) type". In the present embodiment, the "normal fluctuation 16s" in which at least the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is set to be substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is determined according to the number of operation hold balls (holding memory number), but with different selectivity. The configuration is selectable (determined).
It should be noted that (Z1) the present invention can include a loss variation pattern distribution table in which the longest normal variation and / or the shortest normal variation can be selected at different selectivity depending on the number of pending balls. (Z2) Further, the present invention has a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) and a shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first specific fluctuation pattern, depending on the number of balls on hold. , Normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s), and a fluctuation time that is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold. It can include a second loss variation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific variation pattern (for example, normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice). (Z3) Further, the present invention also includes a first loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) with different selectivity according to the number of pending spheres, and the number of reserved spheres. A second loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice) having a fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of Can include. In this case, the selectivity of the first specific variation pattern (normal variation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of operation-holding balls.

Therefore, paying attention to the overall image of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", when the loss (in this embodiment, loss A) that many players encounter in the progress of the game is won, the operation holding ball is relatively large. When the number of holding balls is large (when the number of holdings is 2 to 3), the fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected, and when the number of operating holding balls is relatively small (when the number of holdings is 0 to 1), the fluctuation time is easy to select. It becomes easier to select a relatively long fluctuation pattern. As a result, an appropriate speed is exerted during the fluctuation time, which can contribute to a decrease in the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, and the player feels that the operation holding balls are accumulated and spinning. Further, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the normal fluctuation is selected with a high probability, and the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the higher the probability of the reach fluctuation selection rate. The reach variation of the selection target is "N reach (reach variation with a relatively short fluctuation time)" belonging to the low expectation reach. As a result, the expectation of winning will not be insulted at the time of loss. According to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" according to the present embodiment, it is well-balanced that it contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump and does not instinctively incite the winning expectation at the time of loss. You will be able to create a symbol variation display game.

In addition, the configuration in which "reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation)" can be selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in other words, the reach fluctuation is selected when the number of pending balls is relatively small. Although the configuration is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach variation may be selected only in the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1”, that is, the reach variation may be selected only when the number of pending balls is the smallest. Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", only the normal fluctuation may be selected.

In the present embodiment, when the normal fluctuation type is distinguished by the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds or more such as the normal fluctuation 16s type and the normal fluctuation 13s type is treated as a "long fluctuation pattern" having a relatively long fluctuation time. .. On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as normal fluctuation 4s type and normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" in which the fluctuation time is relatively short. The reason for making such a distinction is that, in a general ball game machine, if the game ball is continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is considered that an operation holding ball can be generated with a high probability. In the case of the present embodiment, those belonging to the short variation pattern include normal variation 4s and normal variation 8s that can be selected during normal variation, and normal variation that can be selected during probability variation (normal variation 2s in Korenso, Koren). There are normal fluctuations such as 8s in the villa: see Fig. 34) and normal fluctuations that can be selected during the time reduction (normal fluctuations in the time reduction 4s, normal fluctuations in the time reduction 8s, etc .: see Fig. 40). , It is easy to be selected when the number of existing operation holding balls is large, or in a gaming state accompanied by an "electric support state" in which operation holding balls are likely to occur.

(Β) The loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is set so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (high frequency fluctuation pattern) having the highest selectivity among the fluctuation patterns defined by each is different (). The fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of balls on hold). Specifically, regarding the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is long in this order of "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2 (hold 1), FH1 (hold 0)". It is stipulated to be. That is, it is defined that the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long as the number of pending balls decreases. In the case of the present embodiment, the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high-frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1". In the case of "normal fluctuation 16s", in the case of "FH2", it is "normal fluctuation 13s", in the case of "FH3", it is "normal fluctuation 8s", and in the case of "FH4", it is "normal fluctuation 4s". Further, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) when the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is selected is "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2". In this order of (hold 1) and FH1 (hold 0), the average fluctuation time is set to be long. In other words, it is set that the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of pending balls decreases.

(A-2. Normal medium special figure 1 side loss B common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH5")
(Γ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5", a fluctuation pattern type having a winning expectation of "less than SPSP reach type (highest expectation reach type)" can be selected. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal fluctuation type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types can be selected. Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach)", which has a higher expectation of winning than the "SP reach type" (the fluctuation time is longer than the SP reach type), is not selected. The average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than that of the above-mentioned loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4".

(A-3. Normal medium special figure 1 side loss C common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH6")
(Δ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6", at least "SPSP reach type" can be selected, that is, the highest expectation reach fluctuation type can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the table configuration selects the reach variation with the longest variation time among the reach variation. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach) can be selected. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected is longer than the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH5" related to other normal medium loss winnings (the longest average fluctuation time). ).

(Special figure 2 side normal middle loss common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH7")
(Ε) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is a fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning the special figure 2 side loss. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, the normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special symbol change display game 2 during normal operation (during special figure 2 change), the winning confirmation is notified at that time. The reason why the number of types of fluctuation patterns at the time of winning the loss on the special figure 2 side is smaller than that on the special figure 1 side is as described below. Normally, there is no electric support, there is almost no prize in the lower starting port 35, and it is rare that a special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated. Therefore, there is no need to make it possible to select a wide variety of fluctuation patterns, and providing a wide variety of fluctuation patterns indiscriminately leads to an increase in the control load.

By the above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table related to the loss winning", the following effects can be obtained.

(A) Loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rate for these symbols is 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C (the probability of lottery is high or low). The relationship is "Loss A> Loss B> Loss C") (see the remarks column in Fig. 4). In the present embodiment, by utilizing the relationship of the symbol lottery rate, a plurality of short fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are selected when the loss A is won and the number of pending balls is relatively large. This facilitates the selection of a plurality of long fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times when the number of holding balls is relatively small. Further, when the loss A is won, the reach fluctuation is selected with a lower probability than when the loss B or the loss C is won. As a result, the symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time does not occur frequently, that is, the fluctuation time is moderately slowed down, which not only contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, but also accumulates the operation holding balls and rotates. It is possible to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time such that the player feels as if (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(Β) In addition, when the loss A is won during normal times, the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the longer the average fluctuation time (the average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game). In other words, as the number of pending balls increases, the average fluctuation time is shortened (see, for example, (α) and (β) above). As a result, the execution time of the symbol variation display game is not unnecessarily prolonged, the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump can be suppressed, and the overflow occurrence rate of the operation hold ball can also be suppressed. Execution time can be generated. In particular, it is suitable in "normal" when the period of stay can be long in terms of the progress of the game.
(Γ) Also, if you win the loss A during normal, the normal fluctuation is selected with a higher probability than the reach fluctuation, and if you win the loss B, the low expectation reach type (N reach or SP reach) has a high probability. If the player wins the loss C, the high expectation reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach) is selected with high probability (see, for example, (α) to (δ) above). That is, in most cases of loss, an effect related to normal fluctuation (normal variation effect) appears, and a reach effect can be produced at an appropriate frequency. As a result, the player is not expected to win the prize excessively. In addition, the rarely appearing high-expectation reach production can greatly enhance the game entertainment (expectation of winning).
(Δ) During the probability change or the time reduction, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of balls on hold (see (ζ) above). As a result, the program capacity is reduced, and the control load can be significantly reduced.

(Third characteristic element)
Further, in the present embodiment, as already described, "normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" are provided. These fluctuation patterns are defined as fluctuation patterns for pre-reading notice, and have the following features.
(A) As shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation time of the “normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice” is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the “normal fluctuation 16s” belonging to the non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type, and the “pre-reading notice N The fluctuation time of "reach 1" is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of "N reach 1" belonging to the non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type. These fluctuation patterns belong to the long fluctuation pattern. In the case of the present embodiment, "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are defined as the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types (belonging to the longest normal fluctuation type).
(B) Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the “normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice” and the “normal fluctuation 16s” are fluctuation patterns of the same system, but the values of the winning commands are different from each other. Further, "N reach 1" for pre-reading notice and "N reach 1" are also fluctuation patterns of the same system, but the value of the command at the time of winning is different from each other.
(C) "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are fluctuation patterns belonging to low expectation fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation type, N reach type), and their winning expectations are substantially the same. is there. Similarly, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns belonging to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, and their winning expectations are substantially the same.

The functions of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" will be explained using the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 while touching the relationship with the appearance control of the pre-reading notice. To do.

With reference to FIG. 32, when the loss A is won during normal operation, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1 to FH4” (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of reservations) at the start of fluctuation according to the number of pending balls. Is selected, and normal variation 16s or N reach 1 can be selected. In rare cases, Loss B (design lottery rate 4%) is won, but at this time, it is selected for the Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern distribution table), and the normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice ". Alternatively, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" may be selected. Here, the game situation in which the player has the highest probability of encountering in the “normal” period in which the stay period can be long in the progress of the game is the winning of the loss A (design lottery rate 95%).

Therefore, as the first effect, when the fluctuation pattern of the low expectation degree is selected, the look-ahead notice does not appear excessively, and the player's expectation of winning is not unreasonably fueled.
Further, as a second effect, when the operation hold ball related to the look-ahead notice is used in the symbol variation display game, the winning expectation due to the look-ahead notice can be maintained for a long time. More specifically, when a pre-reading notice related to a short fluctuation pattern such as a normal fluctuation 4s or a normal fluctuation 8s is generated, the execution time of the symbol variation display game related to the operation holding ball targeted for the pre-reading notice is short, so that it is large. The notice production that was done does not appear and ends easily. In addition, when the execution time of the symbol variation display game is short, a white blinking hold icon (suggests a step-up hold change notice) is displayed, or a step-up hold change notice using the game execution hold K is suggested. It ends easily without raising expectations. In such a case, the player is confused, such as "What was the meaning of that look-ahead notice?" However, in the case of the present embodiment, the "pre-reading notice normal fluctuation 16s" and the "look-ahead notice N reach 1" belong to the long fluctuation pattern (in the case of the present embodiment, the longest normal fluctuation). It is possible to prevent various problems from occurring.

Although there is a difference between "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" whether or not they are subject to pre-reading notice, the same effect can be executed in both symbol fluctuation display games. It is preferable (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1"). That is, the "normal fluctuation 16s" for non-pre-reading notice and the "normal fluctuation 16s" for pre-reading notice that defines a fluctuation time that is substantially the same (including the same) as this, the same production mode during the symbol change. Regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the player is made to recognize that the same variation pattern is selected in terms of production. In this way, by distinguishing fluctuation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates into those for non-pre-reading notice and those for pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice appears appropriately at the time of loss and excessive pre-reading is performed. It is possible to prevent the advance notice from being executed and to moderately fuel the player's expectation of winning (to prevent the player from feeling stress due to the appearance of excessive pre-reading advance notice). Can be done). It should be noted that the “same effect” referred to here preferably means that at least the variation display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect described later) and the advance notice effect are the same, but the “variation display of the decorative pattern” and / Or the "notice effect" may be the same. However, in order to make the effect look similar in terms of effect, it is preferable that the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different, but the other effects are the same. Further, only one or more look-ahead normal variation types having the same function as the "look-ahead notice normal variation 16s" may be provided, or only the look-ahead N reach type having the same function as the "look-ahead notice N reach 1". May be provided one or more.

Further, as described above, "normal variation 16s" and / or "N reach 1" may be defined as the variation pattern for pre-reading notice. In this case, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to a lower probability than that of "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and / or "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". For example, regarding the appearance rate (execution rate) of the look-ahead notice, the relationship satisfies "normal variation 16s <normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "N reach 1 <N reach 1 for look-ahead notice".

Returning to the description of FIG. 11 again, when the start opening winning random number determination process is completed in step S320, a "winning command" is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process, and this is produced and controlled. It is transmitted to the unit 24 (step S321). If the look-ahead is prohibited or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, and a winning command having the "look-ahead prohibition data" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It will be. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H" is acquired as the value on the high-order byte (MODE1) side, and a pre-reading prohibition winning command (B39FH) is transmitted.

Next, a "hold addition command" for designating the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination is created (step S322), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). This "hold addition command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the operation hold ball targeted for pre-reading this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning. It is composed of a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of balls on hold. The hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 side notifies information about the current number of operation hold balls to the hold display areas 76 and 77 when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a look-ahead notice effect is executed. Is also used when issuing a look-ahead notice regarding the hold subject to the notice.

When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command notifies the pre-reading if the information included in the command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation". A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not execution is possible is performed, and if this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the pre-reading notice for the current operation pending ball is executed and controlled. .. On the other hand, in the case of "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly processed as a loss (without executing the notice effect), and the pre-reading notice is given. Prohibit the occurrence of. In this embodiment, the pre-reading prohibition-designated winning command is transmitted in both the case where the pre-reading is prohibited or the setting abnormality error occurs, and the reason is as follows. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting abnormality error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting abnormality error can be resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that inspires gambling from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust at the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally obtain will be lost, causing the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The expression "conditionally" is used because when a setting abnormality error occurs, the look-ahead notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (Fig. 11). Refer to the processing route of step S317 (= 5AH) and step S409 (= 5AH) of FIG. 12 described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 start port check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process (step S302) is executed.

<12. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold in Special Figure 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of balls on hold in action in FIG. 1 is zero (step S402), and the number of balls on hold in action 1 is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation-holding ball". It becomes. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, when "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status when the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 14A described later). (Refer to step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as the effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the game machine 1 is played based on a predetermined execution condition. ) ”Is revealed. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. When it has passed, the customer waiting effect is displayed. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of this symbol variation display game is continuously displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 exhibits a "demo start waiting effect" in which the sound is muted (a predetermined sound effect may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect is started. Further, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen). In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen) without generating the operation holding ball and switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , The effect mode is changed to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs or Control to turn off everything (power saving control).

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. Regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below, the content is substantially different only in the difference between the target of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the target of the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is the target.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "hold subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is data for specifying the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time, and if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, "01H", and the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. If there is, "02H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of reserved storages n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , Hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold. 4 Clear the storage area and provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation-holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it is possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To do. The game state information included in the game state specification command may be any information that is the minimum necessary for performing the target game process, for example, "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and / or "variation pattern". The information can include a "selection mode (Tcode)".

In addition, here, if necessary, a "time saving number command" that can specify the remaining time saving number if it is in the time saving state is transmitted, and a "ST number specifying command" that can specify the remaining ST number if it is in the probability change state. To send. The effect control unit 24 presents a "residual number display effect" that grasps the remaining time reduction number and the remaining ST number based on the information included in these commands, and informs the remaining time reduction number or the remaining ST number in an effective manner. (In the case of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned residual time reduction number of times notification effect is displayed). When the time saving state or the probability change state continues until the next big hit (including the case where it continues until the next big hit (infinite system)), the time saving number command and the ST number specifying command need not be transmitted.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route following S410)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the jackpot determination random number value is used to execute a "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410, first. Based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the fluctuation start side this time), the "hit random number determination table (FIG. 20)" corresponding to the processing target side this time is acquired. For example, if the fluctuation this time is on the special figure 1 side, the "random number table for special figure 1" is acquired, and if it is on the special figure 2 side, the "random number table for special figure 2" is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and a "winning lottery" is performed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the acquired hit random number determination table. Then, if the winning lottery result is "big hit", the big hit determination flag is set to "5AH", and if it is not a big hit, that is, "missing", the big hit determination flag is set to "00H". Further, in the present embodiment, since the support time reduction is also subject to the winning lottery (the winning lottery target lottery form), if the winning lottery result is "support time reduction" winning, "5AH" is set in the support time reduction determination flag (FIG. 20). reference).

Next, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "design lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed by using the winning lottery result in step S410 and the random value for determining the special symbol. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, first, the symbol table (big hit symbol table, lost symbol table) is based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the variable side this time) and the winning lottery result in step S410. , Support time reduction symbol table: see FIGS. 21, 22 to 24). For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', "special". "Big hit symbol table for FIG. 1" is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the above-mentioned determination random number storage area is acquired, a symbol lottery based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value is executed, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

(Counter for the number of consecutive villas)
Further, in the special stop symbol creation process, the count process of the number of consecutive villas related to the above-mentioned probability variation mode is also performed based on the result of the symbol lottery. Here, when the winning type (for example, probabilistic jackpot: see FIG. 5E (a)) for which the number of consecutive villas is counted is won, the number of consecutive villas is incremented by +1. This makes it possible to manage how many consecutive villas the jackpot game executed after this winning game will be. However, if all jackpots are to be counted for the number of consecutive villas, counting processing can also be performed based on the result of the winning lottery. In this case, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410 can be performed.

It should be noted that the count-up method of adding +1 to the number of consecutive villas counter may be used instead of counting the number of consecutive villas this time, but a countdown method of decrementing from the initial value to grasp the number of consecutive villas. Specifically, "07H" is set as an initial value in the consecutive villa count counter at the time of transition to the normal state or when the RAM is cleared. Then, every time the winning type to be counted is won, the number of consecutive villas is subtracted by 1 until the counter becomes zero. In this case, if the value of the number of consecutive villas counter is "06H", it indicates the first hit (1st consecutive villa), and if it is "05H" to "00H", it means the 2nd to 7th consecutive villas. Is shown. Therefore, in the case of the countdown method, if the value of the consecutive villa count counter is "06H" to "04H" (1st to 3rd consecutive villas) in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described later, the probability change mode 1 is set. The data for migration is buffer-set, and if it is "03H" to "01H" (4th to 6th consecutive villas), the data for transitioning to the probability variation mode 2 is buffer-set, and if it is "00H", it is. The data for shifting to the probabilistic mode 3 is buffer-set (see the remarks column in FIG. 42).

After completing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the game state transition preparation process is then executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit or a support time reduction is won, necessary setting processing is performed to specify the game state of the transition destination.

Specifically, FIG. 42 shows FIG. 42 in which a data group for designating the game state of the migration destination is defined according to the winning type (special symbol determination data) determined by the symbol lottery and the game state determination number (YJ). Refer to the "game state transition table" and store various data in the corresponding state buffer.

The game state transition table shown in FIG. 42 is provided with JTTBL-1 to JTTBL-6 in order to specify each game state (game mode). As shown in the drawings, JTTBL-1 to JTTBL-6 are defined with data for designating the internal gaming state and data for shifting to the probability variation modes 1 to 3 and the time saving modes 1 to 3. In addition, JTTBL-1 is the data for shifting to the probability change state (probability change mode 1), but as shown in the remarks column in the figure, according to the number of consecutive villas (according to the value of the above-mentioned consecutive villa count counter). , "01H" to "03H" are set in the variable pattern distribution designation number buffer.

In the case of a big hit, the value stored in the state buffer is read out in the big hit end process (step S509) shown in FIG. 15 described later, and in the case of a support time reduction, the support time reduction special electric combination shown in FIG. 15 described later. It is read out in the object operation process (step S504) and stored in a predetermined storage area (flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each state buffer) of the RAM 203. As a result, the game state (the transition destination game state of FIGS. 4, 29, and 42) after the big hit game or after the support time shortening opening / closing game is designated.

The roles of the various state buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Public accessory open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON (operating) / OFF (non-operating) designation data of each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, and the normal symbol that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data for the symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function, and the special symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function are set.
(Β) "Special symbol time reduction counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of time reductions (number of times of electric support) (data for a special symbol time reduction counter) is set (see steps S478 to S481 of FIGS. 14A to 14B).
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of STs (data for a special symbol probability variation counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 14B).
(Δ) "Special symbol fluctuation count counter 1-3 buffer"
Data (data for a special symbol fluctuation count counter) for designating the number of continuations of a specific fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(Ε) "Fluctuating pattern distribution designation numbers 1 to 3 buffers"
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) that specifies the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be the update destination is set. The update conditions include, for example, when the jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 14A), when the time reduction ends (step S481 in FIG. 14B), when the probability change ends (step S486 in FIG. 14B), and the special symbol fluctuation count counter becomes zero. There are times (step S490 in FIG. 14B), the end of the jackpot game (S509 in FIG. 15), the time when the support time is shortened (step S476 in FIG. 14B, step S504 in FIG. 15), and the like.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) (current game state), set value information (acquired as necessary), and operation. Acquire the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the number of reserved balls (excluding the operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation, the number of existing operation-holding balls 0 to 3: see step S403), and perform the fluctuation pattern distribution. With reference to the minute table, based on the fluctuation pattern lottery based on the random number for the fluctuation pattern (obtained in the process of step S314 in FIG. 10), the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding sphere used for the current fluctuation display operation. To determine. Then, a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the determined fluctuation pattern content is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing at the start opening winning point in step S320 of FIG. 11 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process includes the following processes (A) to (F).

(A) "Variation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" that selects (determines) the "variation pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time,
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (A) above, the "variation pattern determination process" for determining the variation pattern according to the random value for the variation pattern, and
(C) The fluctuation time (including the addition time required for the pseudo-ream) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination process is determined, and the timer management area of the RAM in the area is the "special symbol accessory operation timer". "Fluctuating time setting process" to be set to "
(D) It is configured to include a "command transmission process" for transmitting a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the content of the variation pattern acquired in (B) above to the effect control unit 24. The variation pattern determination process (B) is a process of acquiring command data of a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern.

At the start of fluctuation, unlike the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading determination), the fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in consideration of the number of reserved balls for operation (the number of reserved balls for operation at the start of fluctuation in step S403). When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the command data on the upper byte side (MODE2: specify the difference between hits and misses) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for constructing the "variation pattern specification command" are determined. .. As a result, the fluctuation pattern specification command is determined, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified.

With the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined. In addition, this fluctuation time becomes the game time (variation display time (effect time) of the decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.

The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way includes at least the winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state, and the variation time. Information, execution designation information of a specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.) are included. The main control unit 20 transmits a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the contents to the effect control unit 24, and the information included in the variation pattern specification command is the design variation of this time on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when determining the production scenario related to the display game (variable display of decorative patterns, various notice effects, etc.).

After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol), and a combination of decorative symbols. It is used when determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command, the effect control unit 24 determines the effect to be executed during the symbol variation display game based on the information contained in these commands, and determines the effect to be executed during the decorative symbol variation display this time. Start the game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, in step S409, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when a setting error error is occurring (step S409: = 5AH), the special electric combination in step S410. The random number determination process (winning lottery) for determining the object operation is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is executed. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always processed as "loss" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the error and select it, but it may be configured so that a specific existing fluctuation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing fluctuation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred, and do not select the reach fluctuation type that fuels the expectation of winning, but only the normal fluctuation pattern type. It is preferable to select. In the situation of forced loss, it no longer makes sense for the game, so it is preferable to select the long fluctuation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s in this embodiment). Select only. Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started) as "the game cannot be continued". In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the game machine is turned off. In the present embodiment, the error notification is continued even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is cleared.

<13. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 13>
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the change time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing, so this special symbol change processing is performed without doing anything. Exit.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a "fluctuation stop command" indicating that the special symbol has been changed is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451: YES). S452). By this fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol currently being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), Switch the special symbol operation status to "Confirming (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status), store 00H (OFF state) in the special symbol changing flag (step S453), and this. Exit the processing during special symbol change. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During this fixed display time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) (for example, the fixed display period CT in FIG. 29).

When the above special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<13. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 14A and Fig. 14B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 14A and 14B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 14A and 14B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 13). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot determination flag, the condition device operation flag is turned ON, and the other state is set to a low probability and no electric support state, and the consecutive villa counter is cleared.

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the support time reduction determination flag is determined (step S476). When the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the support time reduction symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the support time reduction determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the support time reduction start flag as various setting processes (support time reduction start pre-processing) when the support time reduction symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the support time saving symbol are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter (time reduction counter) is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol after subtraction It is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481). Here, as a setting process at the end of the time saving, as shown in the figure, the transition setting process from the time saving state to the normal state is performed, such as setting the electric chew support function to the OFF state and setting the Tcode to 00H (normal). .. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" will be selected.

After completing the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state specification command here includes information for specifying the end of the time saving state. By this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state is shifted from the next game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (65536 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as the setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state, and the transition setting process from the probability change state to the normal state is executed. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. When the latent state is provided, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485 for the latent state as well as the processing of the latent state, and the end timing of the latent state is set in the setting process at the end of the probability change. It is managed.

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here includes the end of the high probability state (probability change state or latent state). Contains the information you specify. By this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the probabilistic state or the latent probable state has ended in this game, and grasps that it will shift to the normal state from the next game.

When the game state information transmission process in step S487 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol change number counter is zero (step S488). Here, the change timing of the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) based on the number of game executions (number of fluctuations) is monitored.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the update timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not set, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update process (variation pattern distribution designation number update process) is executed. (Step S491). For example, when infinite time reduction is given, that is, when shifting to "time reduction mode 1 ⇒ time reduction mode 2 ⇒ time reduction mode 3", the current time reduction mode is first "time reduction mode 1" and a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation count counter becomes zero, "Tcode = 04H (variation pattern distribution designation number 1)" that specifies the current time saving mode 1 to "Tcode = 05H (variation pattern distribution designation number 1)" that specifies the time saving mode 2. Update to "2)" and set 100 times in the special symbol fluctuation count counter. Then, when the current time saving mode is "time saving mode 2" and the special symbol fluctuation number counter becomes zero, "Tcode = 05H (variation pattern distribution designation number 2)" that specifies the current time saving mode 2 Update to "Tcode = 06H (variation pattern distribution designation number 2)" that specifies the time saving mode 3 and set 65335 times in the special symbol fluctuation count counter.

After completing the game state update process in step S491, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here can specify the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). Contains information.

As described above, when the special symbol change start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 15 is performed. (Step S095).

<14. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 15>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines the ON / OFF state of the flag before the start of the support time reduction (step S501). When the support time reduction start flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), that is, when the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction special electric accessory operation process is executed (step S504). Here, the setting process required to execute the support time reduction opening / closing game and the state buffer set in the above-mentioned "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" when the support time reduction opening / closing game is completed. Each value is set in the flag area and counter corresponding to the state buffer, and the flag before the start of support time reduction is cleared. As a result, the game state after the support time shortening opening / closing game is specified. At the start of the support time reduction opening / closing game, the "support time reduction opening / closing game start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and at the end of the support time reduction opening / closing game, the "support time reduction opening / closing game end command" is transmitted. These commands display the effect during the support time shortening opening / closing game (opening effect (starting INT during effect), opening / closing operation during the game, ending effect (end INT during effect, etc.)) on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when.

When the support time reduction start flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the ON / OFF state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the support time shortening opening / closing game nor the big hit game is in progress, the special electric accessory management process is exited without doing anything.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S502: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. The special electric accessory operation status includes "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "during operation start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game. 01H) ”,“ Operating (02H) ”which specifies that the round game is being executed, and“ Continuing judgment (03H) ”which specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S502, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination" ( One of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the status value is any of "03H)" and "Big hit end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for executing and controlling the jackpot game, and the hit games corresponding to various hits are realized through the processes of steps S505 to S509. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The “big hit start process” in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "big hit", this "big hit start process" is first executed.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as the setting process (setting process at the start) required when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes an allowable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 14A) and the big hit is confirmed, until the special variation winning device 52 is activated (1R round). It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening production section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. The "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. When the effect control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, a series of hit effects (opening effect, during the round) developed during the current big hit game (during the start INT, between round games, during the round game, during the end INT, etc.) The production, the interval production between rounds, the end production of the round, the ending production, etc.) are decided, and the opening production is started. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation start process” in step S506 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In the special symbol accessory operation timer here, the interval time before the start of the round is set. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "big hit start processing (step S505)" is monitored, but the main processing is performed in the 2nd and subsequent rounds. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (int between Rs) from the end of this round game to the start of the next round game is set. Be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the pre-opening interval time (start interval time in the case of the 1st round) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current number of rounds (continuous count counter) The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Data for winning opening opening / closing operation pattern) is set.

Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)", and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “processing during operation of the special electric accessory” in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric accessory is in operation, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "special electric accessory operation start processing (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum number of winnings is reached, so that the large winning opening 50 being opened is open. Will be closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24. This grand prize opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of winning in the large winning opening and information on the number of winning balls (the setting value information may also be included), and a prize is notified that the large winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for controlling the appearance of setting suggestion effects using prize-winning effects. For example, when there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the maximum number of prizes is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is "Continued judgment". (03H) ”, and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. This "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the inter-round INT effect during the inter-round INT. As a result of the above, the processing during operation of this special electric accessory is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process” in step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a setting process at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory operation status. Is switched to "End processing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end INT" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and refers to a time width in which the ending effect section is defined.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of identifying the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs the jackpot game after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the production mode.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the “big hit end process” in step S509 will be described.

When entering the jackpot end process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed), each value of the state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10) corresponds to the state buffer. Set in the flag area and counter respectively. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

Next, as various setting processes at the end of the jackpot, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, and the game status notification LED output number is updated. , The operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "start processing (00H)".

When the above-mentioned jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is terminated.

As described above, the preferred embodiments of the first embodiment can be summarized as the following configuration examples 1A to 9A.

[Configuration Example 1A]
An acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value.
A symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the big winning opening,
The accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory, and
Game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 15) capable of controlling the game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. A gaming machine comprising FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
A big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot: FIG. 4) and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time reduction A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Fig. 4, Fig. 25, Fig. 29) are included at least.
The game state control means
When the special time reduction is won, the gaming machine is controlled to the time reduction state (FIGS. 4, 25, 29, 42).

[Configuration Example 2A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value.
Based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, the symbol determination means main control unit 20 for determining the type of winning, S411 in FIG. 12), and
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the big winning opening,
The accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory, and
Game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 15) capable of controlling the game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. A gaming machine comprising FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
A big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot: FIG. 4) and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time reduction A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Fig. 4, Fig. 25, Fig. 29) are included at least.
The game state control means
When the special time reduction is won, the time reduction state is controlled until the number of times the symbol changes are displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit.
The special time reduction includes a plurality of types of special time reductions (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29) having different upper limit times.
The symbol determination means
When the result of the winning determination is the winning of the special time saving, one of the plurality of types of the special time saving is determined as the winning type (FIGS. 4 and 23).

[Configuration Example 3A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a hit based on the first random value, and
When the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, a symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) capable of determining the type of the hit based on the second random number value, and
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A gaming machine including a game state control means capable of controlling a time-saving state in which a rate of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than that of a normal state.
The symbol determination means
When the result of the winning determination by the winning determination means is a loss, a lottery regarding whether or not to give the time saving state is executed using the second random number value (FIGS. 25 to 28). , A game machine characterized by that.

[Configuration Example 4A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit.
The upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of time saving given by the time saving big hit) and the upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is lost (support) The number of times is different from the number of times given by the time reduction (4R time reduction jackpot time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times) ≠ support time reduction time reduction performance (support time reduction B 200 times or support time reduction C infinite time reduction ( A gaming machine characterized in that the number of time reductions is 65535 times)).
In addition, the case where the lottery result is lost means that in the case of the winning lottery target lottery form (Figs. 4 and 20), the winning lottery did not win the "big hit", and here, support is provided. It can include cases where the time saving is won. Further, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), it is the case that the "loss" is won in the winning lottery.

[Structure Example 5A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit.
It is configured so that the time saving state can be controlled depending on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss.
The upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of time saving given by the time saving big hit) and the upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is lost (support) A game characterized in that it is the same as the time reduction performance given by the time reduction (4R time reduction jackpot time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times) = support time reduction time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times by support time reduction A)). Machine.
In addition, the case where the lottery result is lost means that in the case of the winning lottery target lottery form (Figs. 4 and 20), the winning lottery did not win the "big hit", and here, support is provided. It can include cases where the time saving is won. Further, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), it is the case that the "loss" is won in the winning lottery.

[Configuration Example 6A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won.
The reach variation pattern includes a plurality of reach variation patterns having different variation times.
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a reach fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number of times than before (FIG. 34).

[Configuration Example 7A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number of times than before (FIG. 34).

[Configuration Example 8A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
When the number of consecutive villas exceeds the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected becomes relatively longer when the lottery result is lost, while the lottery result is a hit. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected does not change (the configuration of (T27) above, a modification of FIG. 33).

[Configuration Example 9A]
A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
When the number of consecutive villas exceeds the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is a hit is relatively longer, while the lottery result is lost. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected does not change (the configuration of (T26) above, a modification of FIG. 34).

[Second Embodiment]
<Variable display operation effect of decorative pattern: FIGS. 44 to 57>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol will be described. The decorative symbol variation display effect is a series of symbol variation display operation modes (decorative symbol variation pattern) from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop display (particularly, fixed display), and here, the left symbol shown in FIG. , The middle symbol and the right symbol are dealt with in the symbol variation display mode of the three decorative symbols. The variable display effect of the decorative symbol is used as a part of the effect in the pattern variable display game. Unless otherwise required, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern is abbreviated as "decorative pattern effect".

The decorative design effect is used to notify the reach state (reach effect), the occurrence of pseudo-ream, the final game result (big hit lottery result), and to liven up the notice effect (notice during change). It functions as important identification information for notifying the start and end, and can be said to be the core of the decorative pattern variation display game. In other words, the decorative design effect not only enriches the variation of the effect by the display operation, but also makes it difficult to feel stress when the game result ends with a loss, and makes it difficult to feel the occurrence of fluctuating slump. It is considered to be an important production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the directing effect of the decorative pattern production.

In the present embodiment, attention is paid to the time when a lot of players encounter a loss in the progress of the game, and in order to enrich the production variation during the pattern fluctuation and improve the player's hitting comfort, the "decorative pattern" is executed at the end of the game. The "stop operation pattern (stop operation mode of the decorative pattern)" has been devised.

(Outline of decorative design production)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, an outline of the decorative design effect will be described. Here, first, the outline of a series of variable display operations of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The "stopping operation pattern of the decorative symbol", which is closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of a decorative symbol effect (decorative symbol variation pattern) related to the normal variation 13s.

In the decorative symbol production, for example, as shown in "Stop operation long" in FIG. 44 (a), first, three decorative symbols start variable display all at once or separately from the stop display state (confirmed display state), and each of them starts variable display. The decorative symbol starts a "high-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" high-speed fluctuation ")" (at 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed fluctuation, each decorative symbol is in a display state that is difficult to identify or cannot be identified, and the transmittance of the decorative symbol is higher than that at the time of stop display. For example, the background image corresponding to the current effect mode is displayed at high speed. It becomes identifiable through the changing decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned "transmittance" means the degree or the ratio thereof that other images existing on the back surface of the image can be seen through with respect to the image for which the transmittance is set. Specifically, when the transmittance of a certain image is set to 0%, the other images superimposed on the back surface of the image are completely invisible (indistinguishable state), but the transmittance is set to 100%. If so, it becomes completely transparent and only the other image can be seen. Therefore, if the transmittance is set to an appropriate value, the image is displayed as a translucent image according to the transmittance (0% <transmittance A <99%). The transmittance of the above decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation may be at least higher than the transmittance during low-speed fluctuation described later (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). , It is preferable that the other image (background image) superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern is in a display state having sufficiently distinguishable transparency. In addition, various notice effects are also executed when the decorative design starts to change.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44 again, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the stop operation is performed at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol", respectively. After the start, each symbol sequentially starts decelerating from the high-speed fluctuation and enters the period of the "low-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" low-speed fluctuation ")". The period of this low-speed fluctuation is the "slow-down display period (deceleration period)" in which the symbol stops while gradually slowing down, and the transmittance is confirmed and displayed immediately after the start of the stop operation (timing of the start of the stop operation). It is reduced to almost the same (meaning that it includes the same; the same applies hereinafter), and the decorative design is redisplayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation period, the transmittance of the decorative symbol is always lower than that during the high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). It may be configured so that the transmittance gradually decreases with the progress of.

After the period of the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation (slow-down display)" has elapsed, the period of the "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as" temporary stop ")" is entered. In this example, the temporary stop period is sequentially entered at the time points of 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds for each symbol. During this temporary suspension period, the design will "sway". The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol related to the "pseudo-ream" (temporary stop state before the re-variation display operation of the decorative symbol). The transmittance during the temporary stop is substantially the same as the transmittance during the confirmed display (transmittance during the confirmed display γ% = transmittance δ% during the temporary stop period = approximately 0%), and the design is sufficient. Displayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp what kind of symbol has stopped.

Then, when the temporary stop period elapses (at the time of 13 seconds), the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) ends, and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed (fixed display period), whereby a series of decorative symbol effects is produced. The end, that is, the decorative pattern variation display game this time is ended. The fixed display period is a time width provided corresponding to the "fixed display time (500 ms: see step S453 in FIG. 13)" set when the special symbol finishes the fluctuation time, and is the final. It is used as a definite display time for definitively notifying the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. The next decorative pattern variation display game will start after this fixed display period.

Although not shown, to be precise, the speed of the decorative symbol becomes zero at the end of the low-speed fluctuation, and after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, 0.3 second stop display: pause period). ), Temporary stop is started. That is, the flow of the basic variation display operation of the decorative symbol in one symbol variation display game is, to be exact, "high-speed variation-> low-speed variation-> pause-> temporary stop-> all symbol confirmation display". Therefore, when referred to as "the symbol that stops first", it means the symbol that ends the low-speed fluctuation first or the symbol that temporarily stops first. In the present specification, in order to simplify the explanation, "the symbol that stops first", "the symbol that stops second", and "the symbol that stops last" are respectively "the symbol that temporarily stops first". , "The symbol that temporarily stops second" and "The symbol that temporarily stops last".

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the above "low speed fluctuation period (slow down display period)" is the "period from the start of the stop operation to the temporary stop", and the low speed fluctuation period is referred to as "stop operation". Sometimes referred to as "period". In addition, the effect during the stop operation period may be referred to as "stop operation effect".

(About the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern: Fig. 45)
The outline of a series of variable display operations of decorative patterns has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern (display mode related to the stop operation period) of the decorative symbol. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, three stop operation patterns of "stop operation short", "stop operation middle", and "stop operation long" shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c) are dealt with. Note that FIG. 45 shows the temporal transition of each symbol in the stop operation pattern of each symbol, with the time point t at which the first stop (temporary stop) starts the stop operation as 0 second. The relational expressions connected by have almost the same meaning). Further, for convenience of explanation, each period related to the decorative symbol effect (variable display operation of the decorative symbol) in FIG. 45 is described as follows.
(B) The period during the stop operation of the left symbol is "LMT during the period during the left stop operation".
(B) The period during the stop operation of the right symbol is "RMT during the right stop operation period".
(C) The period during the stop operation of the middle symbol is "CMT during the middle stop operation".
(D) The temporary suspension period of the left symbol is "Left temporary suspension period LPT".
(E) The temporary suspension period of the right symbol is "Right temporary suspension period RPT".
(F) The temporary suspension period of the middle symbol is "Left temporary suspension period CPT".
(G) The fixed display period (common to all decorative patterns) is set to "fixed display period CT".
(H) The stop operation period (LMT + LPT) of the left symbol is set to "Left stop operation period LST".
(I) The stop operation period (RMT + RPT) of the right symbol is set to "Right stop operation period RST".
(N) The stop operation period (CMT + CPT) of the middle symbol is set to "Middle stop operation period CST".

In the present embodiment, regarding the stop operation pattern, the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop (confirmed display) (here, "left stop operation period LST"). A plurality of stop operation patterns having different (corresponding) are provided. The plurality of stop operation patterns are provided with at least stop operation patterns of a first period, a second period, and a third period having different stop operation periods (stop operation times), and the first period, the second period, and the third period are provided. The stop operation period becomes longer in this order of three periods. Of these, the stop operation pattern of the first period is called "stop operation short", the stop operation pattern of the second period whose stop operation period is longer than the first period is called "stop operation middle", and the stop operation period is The stop operation pattern of the third period, which is longer than the second period, is referred to as "stop operation long". For example, in relation to the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to (c), the stop operation pattern having the shortest stop operation period (shortest time) is "stop operation short", and the stop operation period is the longest. The stop operation pattern for the period (maximum time) is "stop operation long", and the stop operation pattern for the stop operation period longer than the stop operation short and shorter than the stop operation long is "stop operation middle".

(Specific example of stop operation short circuit: FIG. 45 (a))
“Stop operation short circuit” will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a).

As shown in the figure, the "stop operation short" according to the present embodiment starts the stop operation (slow down display) at substantially the same timing for all the symbols on the left, right, and middle (at 0 seconds). After a low-speed fluctuation period of 0.5 seconds (during the stop operation period), all the symbols are temporarily stopped (paused) at substantially the same timing. After that, after a temporary stop (sway fluctuation) for 0.5 seconds, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 1 second). In the case of this stop operation short, all the symbols perform the stop operation all at once, and the confirmation is displayed only after 1 second, so that it seems that the operation is stopped quickly.

(Specific example of stop operation middle: FIG. 45 (b))
Next, the “stop operation middle” will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b).

The "stop operation middle" according to the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned stop operation short, and the stop operation order of each symbol is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol". In the case of the present embodiment, after the left symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) first enters the stop operation, the right symbol and the middle symbol sequentially enter the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol (0.5 seconds). (At the time of 1 second), each symbol sequentially enters the temporary stop in the order of starting the stop operation (see the time points of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds in the figure). Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the last temporarily stopped middle symbol, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop operation middle, the stop operation period (3 seconds) longer than the stop operation short (1 second), that is, each symbol seems to stop more slowly than the stop operation short. However, in the case of the stop operation middle, each symbol stops at a good tempo because of the stop operation that "in the middle of the stop operation of the symbol that stops first, the other symbols stop in sequence". It's easy to get the feeling of going. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56 (a modified example of the stop operation pattern) described later, each symbol also has a stop operation mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time (left and right simultaneous stop), and then the middle symbol is stopped. Is easy to get the feeling that it stops at a good tempo.

(Specific example of long stop operation: FIG. 45 (c))
Next, the above "stop operation long" will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (c).

In the "stop operation long" according to the present embodiment, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol" in the order of the stop operation of each symbol as in the stop operation middle. It is the same in that it does. However, it differs in the following points. In the case of a long stop operation, the left symbol first enters the stop operation, and then temporarily stops at 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right symbol enters the stop operation at 1.5 seconds when the left symbol enters the temporary stop, and then enters the temporary stop at 3 seconds. Further, the middle symbol enters the stop operation at 3 seconds when the right symbol enters the temporary stop, and enters the temporary stop at 3.5 seconds. That is, every time the symbol that started the stop operation first in chronological order enters the temporary stop, the remaining symbols enter the temporary stop, and 0.5 seconds after the last temporarily stopped symbol, that is, the left symbol. All the symbols are confirmed and displayed 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation of. Therefore, when the stop motion long is applied, each symbol seems to stop more slowly than the stop motion middle. Although the details will be described later, in the case of a long stop operation, the symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end is characterized in that it stops in a shorter time than other symbols.

Relationships when focusing on each period (period LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) for each of the above stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) Is as shown in FIG. 45, and items that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, and the relationship between the length of the stop operation period Etc.) are self-evident matters and are included in the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long have different stop operation modes (during stop operation effect modes) of the decorative symbols, and thus can give different impressions in terms of effect.

(Application example of stop operation pattern 1: FIG. 44)
Next, an application example of each stop operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 shows an example in which each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time. Specifically, it is an example in which each stop operation pattern is applied to the decorative symbol effect in a specific normal variation pattern, and here, the decorative symbol effect related to "normal variation 13s" is typically shown.

Since the stop operation period becomes longer in this order for the stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long, when applied to the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time, as shown in the figure, the high-speed fluctuation period is the stop operation long and stop. The length increases in the order of operation middle and stop operation short. Further, in the case of the stop short in this example, each symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing, temporarily stops at substantially the same timing, and then is fixedly displayed. Therefore, each symbol has a high-speed fluctuation period. , MT during stop operation (low speed fluctuation period: LMT, RMT, CMT) and temporary stop period (LPT, RPT, CPT) are substantially the same period.

On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle, the right symbol starts the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol that stops first, and the middle symbol that stops last in the middle of the stop operation between the left symbol and the right symbol. Starts the stop operation, so during the period during the left stop operation, the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), but only the left symbol and the right symbol are slow. There may be overlapping periods that show down display (maintaining semi-transparency with low transmittance), or overlapping periods that show slow-down display for all symbols.

In the case of a long stop operation, the right symbol starts the stop operation at the timing when the left symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing), and the middle symbol stops at the timing when the right symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing). In order to start the operation, during the left stop operation period LMT, the middle symbol and the right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), and during the right stop operation period RMT, only the middle symbol is moving. During high-speed fluctuation (maintaining translucency with high transmittance) (see Fig. (B)). Also, in the case of long stop operation, the deceleration rate of the middle symbol that stops last is stronger than the left symbol or the right symbol, and the middle symbol stops the fastest, and the left symbol and the right symbol are The deceleration rate is almost the same, and it stops more slowly than the middle symbol. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the middle symbol, which is temporarily stopped last, is quickly temporarily stopped while the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Such a "short stop operation (short-time stop operation) of the final stop symbol" is suitable in a situation where a loss is known, for example, "at the time of non-tempai (non-reach)". The reason is as follows. If the last stopped symbol is slowly stopped when it is not in the reach state, the temporary stop may be unnecessarily long, which may give the player a feeling of frustration, and such a stop operation occurs frequently. This is because the entertainment interests of the game are reduced. Therefore, when the game is not in the reach state, the short stop operation of the final stop symbol is executed to give the player a feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. As a result, even if the player sees the stop motion, he / she is less likely to feel excessive stress, and it is possible to produce a decorative pattern that is comfortable for the player to hit.

In FIG. 44, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern effect related to the "normal fluctuation 13s" is typically described, but the specific normal fluctuation pattern may be one or a plurality of types. Further, it can be appropriately determined whether to apply one or a plurality of stop operation patterns among the stop operation patterns. For example, in the case of a short variation pattern (for example, normal variation 4s), only one stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short) is applied, and a plurality of stop operation patterns (for example, stop operation short) are applied to the long variation pattern. , At least two of stop operation middle and stop operation long) can be applied.

As described above, when each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is applied to the same fluctuation pattern, the high-speed fluctuation period may be different depending on the stop operation pattern. The stop operation period can be different. That is, even with the same variation pattern, it is possible to make the stop operation mode (effect during the stop operation) of the decorative symbol different, and it is possible to give a different impression in terms of effect. Utilizing such a directing merit, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, if the stop operation pattern is different according to the effect executed (appearing) during the symbol variation display game, the effect is free. It is possible to improve the degree and variation of the production. This will be described with reference to FIG.

(Example of application of stop operation pattern according to the effect to be executed (effect during stop operation): FIG. 46)
FIG. 46 is a timing chart typically exemplifying the decorative symbol effect related to the normal variation 13s, as in FIG. 44, but here, depending on the effect to be executed (for example, a notice effect), FIG. It is a timing chart exemplifying the case where the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern effect is different. FIG. 46 (a) shows a case where "effect A" is executed, FIG. 46 (b) shows a case where "effect B" is executed, and FIG. 46 (c) shows either effect A or effect B. Is not executed (when other effects are executed).

The "directing A", "directing B", and "directing C" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (directing time) of the production is also different. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production A> Production B> Production C".

As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46C, regarding the decorative symbol effect, when the effect A is executed, the "stop operation short" is executed, and when the effect B is executed, the "stop operation middle" is executed. "Is executed, and when the effect A and the effect B are not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect C is executed), the" stop operation long "is executed. As described above, the reason why the stop operation pattern is changed according to the effect time (execution time of the effect) is as follows.

The execution time of the decorative symbol variation display game substantially corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation time is used to, for example, a notice effect suggesting the winning expectation, a setting suggestion effect, or a mere game. A wide variety of productions are performed, such as productions that do not suggest winning expectations (non-notice productions) such as motifs such as explanations and copyrights (character introduction). However, there are cases where the variable time cannot always be used well due to the production time of the effect to be executed. Further, if the fluctuation patterns are provided according to all the effects, the types of fluctuation patterns become enormous, which causes an increase in the control load. Therefore, in the present invention, a plurality of stop operation patterns (effects during stop operation) can be executed with one variation pattern, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the effects and realizing various effects, and also reducing the control burden. It can also contribute to mitigation. In particular, it is a major feature that various effects can be produced by using the stop operation pattern even if the fluctuation pattern is relatively short. This will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the "effect A" having a relatively long effect time is executed, the effect A may end immediately before the end of the fluctuation time. In this example, the case where the effect A ends at 12 seconds is illustrated. In the case of this example, if the game result (decoration stop symbol) is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect A, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect A, and the sense of discomfort at the end of this game is reduced. However, if the stop operation of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the effect A, the effect of the effect A being executed and the stop operation of the symbol (effect during the stop operation) are mixed and the effect is diminished, or the game is played. It may cause confusion for people. When the stop operation middle or the stop operation long is applied to the effect A, as can be seen from FIGS. 46 (b) and 46 (c), the execution period of the effect A and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap with each other. It leads to the problems mentioned above. Therefore, when the effect A (effect time length) is executed, the "stop operation short" having the shortest stop operation period is used among the stop operation patterns.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the effect B having a relatively short execution time is executed, the fluctuation time may end with a certain margin (about several seconds) from the end. .. In this example, the case where the effect B ends at 10 seconds is illustrated.

In the case of FIG. 46B, the end timing of the effect B ends about 3 seconds before the end of the fluctuation time, and that 3 seconds is the "effect free time" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, that is, the "effect slump" "(The time width SRT shown in the figure corresponds to the time width of this effect slump). If the stop operation short is used, there is a risk that the temporary stop state of all the symbols will continue for a while, that is, the production slump will occur and the player will feel stress (increased frustration, etc.). ..

Therefore, when the above-mentioned problems occur, it is preferable to fill the above-mentioned effect slump time SRT by using the effect during the stop operation. In the case of this example, it is preferable to use "stop operation middle" or "stop operation long" for which the period during stop operation is relatively long. However, it can be said that it is more preferable to use the stop operation middle as shown in the figure in order to avoid the overlap between the execution period of the effect B and the stop operation period of the symbol. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbol is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect B, and each symbol is sequentially stopped at a good tempo during the effect slump time SRT (stop operation middle). Is executed, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect B, the effect slump is less likely to be felt, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 46C illustrates a case in which the effect C is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect A and the effect B as a case in which the effect A and the effect B are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is selected. It is preferable to use it. In the long stop operation, the stop operation period (left stop operation period LST: see FIG. 45 (c)) is longer than that in the middle stop operation, so that the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the long stop operation in the case of executing "effect C" which is less than the execution time of effect B (the case of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A"). Is.

As described above, the feature of this example is that even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type of effect to be executed (effect time) and the presence or absence of the effect to be executed. It can be said that it is characterized in that the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing at which the production ends. For example, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the effect B (first effect) that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time and the second end timing that is later than the first end timing are ended. There is an effect A (second effect), and it is preferable to execute the stop operation short in the case of the effect A and the stop operation middle in the case of the effect B.

(Modification example 1)
In the example of FIG. 46, an example in which the stop operation patterns are different when the effects with different effect times are executed has been described, but even when the same effect is executed, the effect depends on the timing at which the effect ends. Therefore, the stop operation pattern can be changed. For example, in the case of executing a predetermined effect (referred to as "effect K" here) for a certain effect time (for example, 6 seconds), the predetermined variation time of the predetermined variation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example). If the start timing of the effect K in the inside is different, the end timing will also be different. Explaining this with reference to FIG. 46, for example, the following cases (I) to (III) can occur.
(I) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 12 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
(II) When the effect K is started from the time of 4 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 10 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46 (b)). ,
(III) When the effect K is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 9 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect C in FIG. 46 (c)). ).
In such a case, as in FIG. 46, it is preferable to make the stop operation pattern different according to the end timing of the effect K. Specifically, the stop operation short is applied in the case (I), the stop operation middle is applied in the case (II), and the stop operation long is applied in the case (III). In this way, even when the same effect is executed, if the end timing of the effect is different, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the end timing.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the example of FIG. 46, when an effect having a different effect time is executed, an example in which a stop operation pattern in which the stop operation period is shorter is applied to the effect in which the effect time is relatively long has been described. However, even when an effect having a relatively short effect time is executed, the end timing may be later than the effect having a long effect time. For example, during the predetermined fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example), the “effect K” with the production time of 6 seconds and the “effect M” with the production time of 7 seconds can be executed. In the case of, for example, the following cases (IV) and (V) can occur.
(IV) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 12 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
(V) When the effect M is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 10 seconds (the case where the effect ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46 (b)). ). In this case, the stop operation short is applied in the case of (IV) above, and the stop operation middle is applied in the case of (V) above, that is, the stop operation middle is applied when the effect M having an early end timing is executed. When the effect K whose end timing is late is executed, the stop operation middle can be applied. Therefore, the stop operation short can be applied even if the effect K has a relatively short effect time, and the stop operation middle can be applied even if the effect M has a relatively long effect time. In this way, when different effects are executed, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which each effect ends.

Regarding the "point at which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing at which the effect ends" described in FIG. 46, the modification example 1, the modification example 2, and the like, the reach stop operation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 52) described later. The same can be said for. That is, the reach stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which the effect ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type of effect (effect time) to be executed. This makes it possible to deal with many effects (effect scenarios) with one variation pattern (variation time). As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production, the improvement of the production variation, and the reduction of the control load. In addition, the following configurations (δ1) to (δ4) can be used.

(Δ1) The effect A, the effect B, and the effect C may be regarded as an effect scenario including one or a plurality of types of effects. Further, any of the effects A, B, and C may be any effect as long as it is executed during the symbol change. For example, any effect such as a notice effect, a non-notice effect, a look-ahead notice during the change, and a setting suggestion effect can be used. Can be adopted.

(Δ2) Each of the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be one or a plurality of types of effects. For example, "Direction A is" Production α + Production β ", Production B is" Production γ + Production δ ", and Production C is" Production ε + Production ζ ". ) ”And“ Production A is “Direction α + Production β + Production γ”, Production B is “Production δ + Production ε”, and Production C is “Production ζ”. Can be different from each other). For example, the effect A can be "effect α + effect β", the effect B can be "effect α + effect γ", and the effect C can be "effect α + effect δ" (each). In the productions A to C, at least one production is the same production, but the effects are different as a whole). For example, there is a case where the effect α is a pseudo-ream and the effect β to the effect δ are different effects. Further, for example, the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be a "step-up effect" composed of a plurality of stage effect steps (for example, the effects SU1 to SU3). Specifically, production A is "directing SU1 + directing SU2 + directing SU3" (developed to the final stage), directing B is "directing SU1 + directing SU2" (developing to two stages), and directing C is "directing SU1" (first stage) Ends with).

(Δ3) The effects A, B, and C have been described on the premise of satisfying the relationship of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A", but they are simply stopped according to the effect type. The operation pattern may be different. In any case, the degree of freedom and variation of the production can be improved.

(Δ4) The “effect B” or “effect C” whose production time is relatively short is preferably a “player participation type production”. The player participation type production uses the operation means (effect button 13 and cross key 75), and it is easy to leave a lingering sound of the production during operation, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the presence of the production slump. The reason is that even if this occurs, it can be dealt with by the middle stop operation or the long stop operation.
The above (δ1) to (δ5) are the same in FIGS. 47 to 57, which will be described later.

(When the same effect is executed with fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times: FIGS. 47 and 48)
Further, as shown in FIG. 47 or 32, when the same effect is executed in the fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, the stop operation pattern can be set according to each fluctuation pattern.

In this example, when the same effect (one or more effects are the same) is executed in a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variation time is relatively long (for example, the variation time is 16s). , A decorative symbol effect with a stop operation pattern (for example, long stop operation) with a relatively long stop operation period is executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, fluctuation time 13s), It is possible to execute a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short or stop operation middle) in which the period during the stop operation is relatively short. Specific examples of this example are shown in FIGS. 47 and 48.

In FIG. 47, when the effect A is executed, the longest normal fluctuation “normal fluctuation 16s” is set to “stop operation long”, the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation, and the shortest normal fluctuation is normal fluctuation 4s. The "normal fluctuation 13s" having a longer fluctuation time indicates a case where the "stop operation middle" or the "stop operation short" is set.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the stop operation has the longest stop operation period. A decorative pattern effect accompanied by a pattern (long stop operation) can be executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern (here, the fluctuation time 13s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, the stop operation during the stop operation is relatively short. It is a configuration in which a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a pattern (for example, a stop operation short and / or a stop operation middle) can be executed.

Further, in FIG. 48, when the effect A is executed, the longest normal fluctuation “normal fluctuation 16s” is set to “stop operation long” or “stop operation middle”, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation. In addition, in the case of "normal fluctuation 13s" in which the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation 4s of the shortest normal fluctuation, the case of "stop operation short" is shown.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the period during the stop operation is relatively long. A decorative symbol effect with a stop motion pattern (for example, stop motion long and / or stop motion middle) can be executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (here, fluctuation time 13s), stop It is a configuration that can execute a decorative pattern effect with a stop operation pattern (stop operation short) with the shortest operation period.

Note that the examples of FIGS. 47 and 48 show a case where the effect slump time (time width SRT in the figure) occurs on the side of the normal variation 16s, which has a long variation time, when the effect A is executed. In such a case, in view of the problems described in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), FIG. 47 ( As shown in a) (c) or FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (c), it is preferable to use "stop operation long" in the case of normal fluctuation 16s and "stop operation short" in the case of normal fluctuation 13s. It can be said that. In this way, even if the same effect is executed for the fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the degree of freedom of production can be increased. It should be noted that FIG. 49 shows a summary of the decorative design effects shown in FIGS. 46, 47 and 48 for easy comparison.

(Other application example A: FIG. 50)
In FIG. 46 described above, a configuration capable of executing different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) has been described depending on the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof. Based on the configuration shown in FIG. 46, it is preferable to use the configuration shown in FIG. 50 according to the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof.

With reference to FIG. 50, in this example, in the case of the first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 13s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, the “stop operation pattern of type number A (for example,“ stop operation short ”” “ It is possible to execute any of the decorative symbol effects with "stop operation middle" and "stop operation long" (see FIGS. 50 (a) to (c) and FIG. 46).
In the case of the second fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 4s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, "stop operation pattern of type number B less than type number A (for example," stop operation short "and" stop operation middle "). Of the decorative symbol effects accompanied by "two types of") ", an embodiment in which any of the decorative symbol effects can be executed is shown (see FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (e)).

The number of types B may satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A", and it is free to adopt any of the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long. However, in the case of the second variation pattern, it is preferable that the decorative symbol effect is executed excluding the stop operation pattern having the longest stop operation period among the decorative symbol effects executed in the first variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal fluctuation 13s, when any one of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is executed, in the case of normal fluctuation 4s, "stop operation short, stop operation middle excluding stop operation long" is executed. It is a configuration that can execute any of. When the second fluctuation pattern is an "extremely short fluctuation pattern" such as "normal fluctuation 4s", the period during the stop operation is the shortest in order to give the player the feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. It is preferable to execute only the stop operation short of.

(Example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage: FIG. 51)
Further, in FIG. 46 described above, even if the fluctuation patterns are the same, different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, etc.) are performed depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed. The configuration that can execute the stop operation long) was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different stop operation patterns can be configured to be executable depending on the effect stage. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 51 shows a case in which different stop operation patterns are executed according to the effect stage even if the fluctuation patterns are the same.

FIG. 51 is a timing chart typically showing a decorative symbol effect related to the normal variation 13s, and shows a case where different stop operation patterns are executed according to the effect stage. FIG. 51 shows a stop operation pattern executed in the effect stages A to C. Specifically, FIG. 51 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a "stop operation short" when the effect stage A is set, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a decorative pattern accompanied by a "stop operation middle" when the effect stage B is used. The effect, FIG. 51 (c) shows a case where a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a “long stop operation” is executed in the case of the effect stage C.

First, in order to facilitate the understanding of this example, the outline of the "directing stage" will be described. The "production stage" is different from the production state ("normal production mode", "probability variation production mode", "time saving production mode", etc.) in which the transition is performed along with the transition of the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. , The transition is controlled by the effect processing on the effect control unit 24 side, and may continue for one or more games. Therefore, even if the effect stage is changed, the game state itself managed by the main control unit 20 is not changed, and the selection target of the variation pattern is the same. That is, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not updated, and the "variation pattern distribution table" referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is not changed. For example, when the current game state is the "normal mode (normal state)", even if the effect stages are different (in this example, the effect stages A to C), the variable pattern distribution table may be shown in FIG. 31 or The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 during normal operation.

However, it is possible to display the effects related to each of the effect stages A to C by the effect control on the effect control unit 24 side. For example, even if the setting is changed from "production stage A to production stage B", the selection target of the fluctuation pattern is the same and the exact same fluctuation pattern can be selected, but different productions can be executed depending on the production stage. Is. For example, when the normal variation 13s is selected, "effect A" is executed in the effect stage A, but another effect (for example, effect B) is executed without executing "effect A" in the effect stage B. Is. In this example, the effect patterns A to C are all the same in the variation pattern to be selected (the point that the exact same variation pattern can be selected), and the effect can be executed according to each effect stage. Focusing on this, we are trying to increase the degree of freedom and variation of the production by making the stop operation pattern of the decorative design different according to the production stage.

A typical production stage is, for example, a "customization function" that allows a player to switch to a desired production stage by operating an operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer. is there. For example, when the current gaming state is the "normal state", the normal production modes are "normal mode (production stage A)", "simple mode (production stage B)", and "premium mode (production stage C)". This is a function that allows you to select one of three types of production stages (player-selectable production stages). What should not be confused is that these effect stages are in the effect state under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the player side can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. It's not a thing. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, some or all of the effects that appear may differ, but the selection target of the variation pattern of the special symbol does not change internally.

For example, "normal mode" is the default effect state, and "simple mode" is an effect state in which the appearance rate of a specific notice effect is lower than that of the normal mode or does not appear at all (specific notice effect appearance rate). Change mode). In the "simple mode", for example, the appearance rate at the time of losing a specific high expectation notice effect (for example, the winning expectation of 30% in the normal mode) with a relatively high winning expectation is lower than that in the normal mode. , When the specific high expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the appearance rate of the player participation type production is lower than that in the normal mode. Also, in the "premium mode", the appearance rate of winning productions (for example, productions with a winning expectation of 90% or a big hit winning confirmation) is higher than in normal mode and simple mode, and one or more types of specific low The appearance rate of the expectation notice is low (including 0%). Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the type of effect (preliminary effect, non-advanced effect, pre-reading notice during change, setting suggestion effect, etc.) to be executed during the symbol change and whether or not the effect is executed according to the effect stage , It is possible to make different types of pending change notices and whether or not they are executed.

In addition, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production stages, a unique background display corresponding to each production stage appears in order to be able to identify which stage is being performed. For example, "normal mode (directing stage A)" has a background image reminiscent of "morning", "simple mode" has a background image reminiscent of "day", and "premium mode" has a background image reminiscent of "night". is there. For example, if the current state is normal, the background display of the base is set to the seasonal "spring" background display in the normal production mode, and "spring morning background" and "spring daytime background" are set according to each production stage of normal, simple, and premium. , The background display is changed to express "spring night background".

Further, the production stage may be configured so that the transition (change) can be controlled by the above-mentioned customization function, or a plurality of types of production stages may be configured to be transition controllable by another transition trigger (change trigger). .. For example, a specific symbol variation display game may be executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after a big hit game, after turning on the power, or after clearing the RAM (including setting change)), a predetermined number of symbol variation display games and a predetermined number of symbols For example, every time a variable display game is executed. In this case, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the production stage by a predetermined lottery. Further, a predetermined transition lottery may be executed for each symbol variation display game, and the production stage may be shifted when the game is won. Further, the production stage may be shifted when a specific production is executed. For example, when a stage change effect is executed, a specific reach effect (for example, a high-expectation reach effect (developed SPSP reach or a direct hit type SPSP reach, etc.)) causes a loss. The production stage of the transition destination may be shifted in a predetermined order, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. As for the transition opportunity of the production stage, one or more conditions are adopted, and when the transition opportunity arrives (when the transition stage transition condition is satisfied), the transition from one production stage to another production stage is performed. Can be (changed). Such shift control of the effect stage is performed by an effect process (effect stage transition means) independently performed by the effect control unit 24 side.

FIG. 51 shows an example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the effect stage even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, but when the stop operation pattern is determined according to the effect stage, it differs depending on the effect stage. It is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern by paying attention to the point that the effect can be executed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, typically, “Direction A, Production B, Production C (Relationship of production time =“ Production C <Production B <Production A ”)” described with reference to FIG. This will be explained using three types of effects. For example, in the production stage A, "production A (long production time)" is likely to be executed, in the production stage B, "production B (medium production time)" is easily executed, and in the production stage C, "production C (production time)" is easily executed. If there is a relationship between the production stages that "is short)" is easy to be executed (neither the production A nor the production B is executed), in short, the production A, the production B, and the production C are performed according to the production stage. The execution probabilities (including zero) are different from each other, and for example, there is a case where one or a plurality of effects having a relatively long effect time are easily executed in the order of effect stages A, B, and C. In such a case, it is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern according to the effect mode (effect time of the effect that is easy to be executed) that is easy to be executed under each effect stage. In this case, it is preferable that the stop operation is short in the case of the effect stage A, the stop operation is middle in the case of the effect stage B, and the stop operation is long in the case of the effect stage C (FIG. 53, which will be described later). The same applies to the reach stop operation of).

The stop operation pattern may be fixed according to the effect stage, but the stop operation pattern may be variable depending on the effect stage. For example, the execution probability of each stop operation pattern may be different depending on the effect stage. Specifically, when determining the decorative pattern effect (variable pattern of the decorative pattern), one of stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long is determined according to a predetermined selection rate according to the current effect stage. To do. For example, the selection rate of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" for the production stage A, and "20%, 50%" for the production stage B. "30%", in the case of production stage C, "10%, 30%, 60%" and the like.

Further, although the stop operation pattern related to the effect stage has been described above, different stop operation patterns may be executed depending on the effect mode. For example, regarding the probabilistic mode, the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the probabilistic mode is "probability mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)". Is. Therefore, the probability variation mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state) is set to "stop operation short", the probability variation mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) is set to "stop operation middle", and the probability variation mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) is set to "stop operation long". Can be done. The same applies to the time saving mode. The relationship between the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game related to the time saving mode is "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)". Therefore, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) can be set to the stop operation short, the time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) can be set to the stop operation middle, and the time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) can be set to the "stop operation long". Further, as for the effect mode, similarly to the case of the effect stage described above, the stop operation pattern may be fixed according to the effect mode, or the stop operation pattern may be variable according to the effect mode. (The execution probability of each stop operation pattern may be different depending on the effect mode). In this case as well, as in the case of the above-mentioned effect stage, when determining the decorative pattern effect (decorative pattern variation pattern), either stop operation short, stop operation middle, or stop operation long is performed according to the current effect mode. Can be determined according to a predetermined selectivity. For example, the selection rate of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" in the case of probability variation mode 3 or time reduction mode 1, and in the case of probability variation mode 2 or time reduction mode 2. Is "20%, 50%, 30%", and in the case of probability variation mode 1 or time saving mode 3, "10%, 30%, 60%" and the like.

(About the stop operation pattern in reach fluctuation: Fig. 52)
In FIGS. 44 to 51, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol has been described mainly focusing on the normal fluctuation pattern. In the following, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol in the reach variation will be described.

FIG. 52 shows an example in which, in the same reach variation, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol before the reach state is formed differs depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed. It is a timing chart. However, since the stop operation pattern dealt with here is a stop operation pattern related to reach fluctuation, it is a stop operation pattern focusing on "a stop operation pattern of a symbol other than the last symbol to stop". That is, the stop operation pattern of the left symbol and the right symbol (reach configuration symbol) forming the reach state (tempai state) is dealt with. Hereinafter, unless otherwise required, the stop operation pattern of the symbol used when forming the reach state is referred to as a "reach stop operation pattern". Regarding the reach stop operation patterns, the reach stop operation patterns corresponding to the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long are referred to as "reach stop operation short", "reach stop operation middle", and "reach stop operation long", respectively. ..

FIG. 52 shows an example in which each reach stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in a predetermined variation display of a predetermined variation time (variation display of a decorative symbol related to a specific reach variation). Is shown. Specifically, it is a timing chart showing a part of the decorative symbol effect related to a specific reach variation, and shows a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed according to the type of effect executed during the symbol variation. It is a thing. FIG. 52 (a) shows a case where "effect D" is executed, FIG. 52 (b) shows a case where "effect E" is executed, and FIG. 52 (c) shows either effect D or effect E. Is not executed (when other effects are executed).

In addition, "Direction D", "Direction E", and "Direction F" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (production time) of the production is also different. .. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production D> Production E> Production F". To put it simply, the relationship between production D and production F corresponds to the relationship between production A and production C in FIG. 46. Further, as an example of a specific reach variation, a variation pattern belonging to "reach variation specified by SP reach" (in the figure, it is expressed as "reach variation A" for the sake of simplicity) is shown. .. The specific reach variation may be another reach variation (N reach, advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach, etc.), or may be one or more types of reach variation.

First, an outline of a series of effects during fluctuation (variation pattern of decorative symbol + notice effect scenario) due to reach variation A shown in FIG. 52 will be described. A predetermined effect (effects D to E in FIG. 52) is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and after the left symbol and the right symbol perform a predetermined stop operation, a reach (tempai) state is formed (time t (variation)). Elapsed time from the start) = 15 seconds). At this time, the "tempai effect" for notifying the reach is executed (t = 15 seconds to 16.5 seconds). The content and production time of this tempai production differ depending on the reach type, and here we explain an example of SP reach type reach, so for example, title notice related to this SP reach and SP that fuels SP reach development A fanning effect is performed. Then, after finishing the tempai effect, a predetermined SP reach effect (16.5 seconds or later (not shown)) corresponding to the reach variation A is executed, and when the variation time ends, a predetermined stop according to the game result is executed. All decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in the display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c), when the effect D is executed, the “reach stop operation short” is executed, and when the effect E is executed, the “reach stop operation middle”, the effect D and the effect. When E is not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect F is executed), the "reach stop operation long" is executed. As described above, the reason for executing the different reach stop operation patterns according to the type of the effect to be executed is basically the same as the content already described with reference to FIG.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, when the effect D having a relatively long execution time is executed, the effect D may end immediately before the reach. In this example, the case where the effect D ends at 14.5 seconds is illustrated. In this case, if the reach state is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the production D, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a high-expectation reach such as SP reach without feeling the production slump. .. In particular, in the reach stop operation short, when the reach state is formed, the "left and right simultaneous tempai" in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) at substantially the same timing is executed. This left and right simultaneous tempai has a stronger impact than the "left and right extraordinary tempai" in which the left and right symbols stop in sequence to form a reach state, and is also used as a warning effect suggesting that the winning expectation is high.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the effect E having a relatively short execution time is executed, there is a certain amount of margin time (about 1 to 2 seconds) than the reach timing (tempai timing). There are cases where it ends. In this example, the case where the effect E ends at 13 seconds is illustrated. In this case, the end timing of the effect E ends about 2 seconds before the tempai timing, and a “effect slump” of 2 seconds can occur (time width SRT in the figure). In particular, in the high-expectation reach production of the SP reach system, the advance notice production with a higher expectation of winning than in the case of normal fluctuation is executed with a high probability by the tempai timing, and therefore, the game "will take reach". In many cases, the expectation of winning a person is fueled. Under such circumstances, if the "reach stop operation short" shown in FIG. 52 (a) is used, the period (effect slump time) for which the temporary stop state of all the symbols continues will be long. As a result, the player may feel that there is a waiting time until the start of the tempai production, which may cause stress.

Therefore, it is preferable to fill the effect slump time by using the stop operation mode (effect during stop operation) of "reach stop operation middle" or "reach stop operation long" for which the period during stop operation is relatively long. In the present embodiment, the “reach stop operation middle” is used as shown in the figure in order to avoid the overlap between the execution period of the effect E and the stop operation period of the symbol. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect E, and during the effect slump time SRT, each symbol forms a reach state while sequentially stopping at a good tempo, so that all the symbols The number of states in which the temporary stop state of the game continues for a while is reduced, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 52C illustrates a case in which the effect F is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect D and the effect E as a case in which the effect D and the effect E are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is set. It is preferable to use it. In the reach stop operation long, the period during the stop operation is longer than that in the reach stop operation middle, so that the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the reach stop operation long in the case of executing "effect F" which is less than the execution time of effect E.

In addition, as can be seen from the illustration, the characteristic point of this example is that the tempai timings of the reach stop operation short, the reach stop operation middle, and the reach stop operation long are the same (substantially the same) timing. (The same applies to FIG. 53 described later). Here, the end of the period during the stop operation (at the end of the slowdown display) of the second stopped symbol (right symbol) is set as the tempai timing (t = 15 seconds) (in the figure (a), the left and right simultaneous tempais are used. There are left and right symbols that stop first). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any timing during the above-mentioned "pause period (not shown)" may be used as the tempai timing. For example, at the end of the stop operation period (at the start of the pause period), at the end of the pause period (at the time of temporary stop of the second stopped symbol (right symbol)), and the like (the same applies to FIG. 53 described later). ).

In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the type of effect (effect time) executed before the reach. Further, even if the execution time of the effect executed before the reach is different, the tempai timing can be set to the same timing in each reach stop operation pattern. This makes it possible to handle many pre-reach productions with one reach fluctuation, and it is easy to adjust the production width of post-reach productions (tempai production, reach production, etc.), old model and new model. It can greatly contribute to the improvement of design compatibility between the two, excellent convenience, reduction of the control load, improvement of the degree of freedom of production, or improvement of production variation.

When the reach effect is executed, a high-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) and a low-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) can be executed according to the winning expectation. Therefore, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on whether the high-expectation notice effect is executed or the low-expectation notice effect is executed. When a high-expectation notice effect is executed, the liveliness and agitation of the effect become stronger (for example, a plurality of advance notice effects occur in combination, and the execution time of the notice effect often becomes long. ), For example, perform a decorative symbol effect with a reach stop motion pattern other than at least a reach stop motion long (for example, apply a reach stop motion middle or a reach stop motion short). On the other hand, when the low-expectation notice effect is executed, paying attention to the fact that the liveliness and the degree of fanning of the effect are relatively weaker than when the above-mentioned high-expectation notice effect is executed, at least the reach is stopped. Perform a decorative symbol effect with a stop motion pattern other than the motion short (for example, apply reach stop motion middle or reach stop motion long). Of course, it is up to you what kind of reach stop operation pattern to apply according to the degree of expectation of winning the notice effect. In any case, the reach stop operation pattern can be changed according to the winning expectation of the advance notice effect to be executed.

(Example in which the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage: FIG. 53)
In FIG. 52 described above, a configuration has been described in which different reach stop operation patterns can be executed depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed even if the reach variation is the same. Here, a configuration example capable of executing different reach stop operation patterns according to the effect stage will be described.

FIG. 53 shows a case in which different reach stop operation patterns are executed depending on the effect stage even if the reach variation is the same. FIG. 53 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “reach stop operation short” when the effect stage A is set, and FIG. 53 (b) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “reach stop operation middle” when the effect stage B is displayed. 53 (c) shows a case where a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “reach stop operation long” is executed in the case of the effect stage C. The production stages A to C in FIG. 53 are the same as the production stages A to C in FIG. 51.

As shown in the figure, the characteristic point of this example is that the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage even if the reach fluctuation is the same, but the tempai timing of each stop operation pattern is the same (substantially the same) timing. This is the point (see the time elapsed from the start of fluctuation = 15 seconds). The point that "the tempai timing is the same regardless of the reach stop operation pattern" is the same as the example described in FIG. 52.

It should be noted that the difference between FIG. 53 and FIG. 52 is that the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the effect stage, and other contents (matters related to the tempai effect, etc.) are substantially the same. In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the production stage. Further, the tempai timing of each reach stop operation pattern can be set to the same timing regardless of the production stage. As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production related to the production stage and the improvement of the production variation.

(Modification example of stop operation pattern: FIGS. 54 to 57)
In the above embodiment, the stop operation pattern shown in FIG. 45 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 may be adopted. In FIGS. 54 to 57, the maximum stop operation period of the stop operation pattern (the period from when the first stopped symbol starts the stop operation until the last stopped symbol stops and is confirmed and displayed), that is, , Left stop operation period It is divided as follows according to the time width of LST.
(Τ1) Stop operation short: 0 ≤ LST <2 seconds (τ2) Stop operation middle: 2 seconds ≤ LST <4 seconds (τ3) Stop operation long: 4 seconds ≤ LST

In the present embodiment, the stop operation pattern types are classified as described in (τ1) to (τ3) above, but when there are a plurality of stop operation pattern types belonging to the same stop operation pattern type, for example, the stop operation middle type is used. If there is a first stop operation middle and a second stop operation middle to which it belongs, the one with a relatively short left stop operation period LST is treated as a "stop operation short", and the left stop operation period LST is relatively. The longer one can be treated as "stop operation middle". Specifically, the stop operation middle B (LST = 3.0s) in FIG. 54, the stop operation middle D (LST = 3.5s) in FIG. 55, and the stop operation middle E (LST = 2.5s) in FIG. 56. If so, the stop operation middle E can be treated as "stop operation short", the stop operation middle D can be treated as "stop operation middle", and the stop operation middle B can be treated as "stop operation long".

Hereinafter, each stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 will be described.

In the stop operation short B shown in FIG. 54 (a), the period during the stop operation of each symbol is zero (LMT = RMT = CMT = 0 (substantially zero)), there is no low-speed fluctuation period, and the high-speed fluctuation period ends. Immediately after that, each symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it seems that the three decorative symbols are suddenly stopped and displayed at substantially the same time after the three decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed for a while. For example, "Don! (Temporary stop of all symbols)". In particular, this stop operation short B has a shorter stop operation period than other stop operation patterns (stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 45, 54 (b) (c) and 55 to 41, which will be described later) (this). In the example, it ends with LST = 0.5 seconds), and when applied to the same fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the biggest feature is that the longest high-speed fluctuation period can be created among all operation patterns. is there. It is preferable to use such a stop operation pattern for an effect having a relatively long effect time (for example, an effect having a longer effect time than the effect A in FIG. 46 and the effect D in FIG. 52). In addition, since the stop operation period is extremely short, when starting the next game at a good tempo in a short time, for example, a game state (time saving state) accompanied by a state with electric support in which an operation holding ball is likely to occur in a short time. , Probability change state) It is preferable to use it for the normal fluctuation pattern.

The stop operation middle B and the stop operation middle C shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c) differ in the stop operation of the middle symbol in the stop operation middle shown in FIG. 45, and the middle symbol stops quickly (short stop of the final stop symbol). It is characterized in that it operates). The point that the middle symbol performs this "short stop operation of the final stop symbol" is the same as the stop operation long shown in FIG. 45. Therefore, it is suitable for starting the next game at a good tempo (when there is at least one operation hold ball) in a situation where a loss is known, such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)". is there.

The stop operation middle D shown in FIG. 55 (a) and the stop operation long B shown in FIG. 55 (b) are characterized in that the period during the stop operation of each symbol is different (in this example, "left stop". Operating period LMT> Right stop Operating period RMT> Medium stop Operating period CMT "). In these stop motion patterns, it seems that after the left symbol enters the stop motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol are sequentially stopped with good rhythm. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Tan ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Further, the stop operation middle D or the stop operation long B starts the next game at a good tempo in a situation where a loss such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)" is known, as in the stop operation long in FIG. It is suitable for making it.

As shown in the drawing, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol stops in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol seems to stop slowly at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right) → Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform temporary left and right simultaneous stops, in addition to the case of stopping the lost stitch (for example, the loose stitch), the reach stop operation of FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

As shown in the drawing, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol stops in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing as the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the middle symbol slowly stops at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right) → Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform temporary left and right simultaneous stops, in addition to the case of stopping the lost stitch (for example, the loose stitch), the reach stop operation of FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

The relationships (periods LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) when focusing on each period with respect to each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns are as shown in FIGS. 54 to 57. Matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, etc.) are self-evident. It is included in the scope of the technical idea of the invention. Further, it goes without saying that any of the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 can be used as the reach stop operation pattern.

<16. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 16 to 19>
Next, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 16) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 17).

<16. Production control side main processing: Fig. 16>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the game machine main body, the effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) first performs the necessary initial setting process before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In the present embodiment, the main loop processing is performed every about 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO), the decorative symbol The random numbers for various production lottery used for the lottery such as the advance notice production during the variable display game are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is cleared are executed. It should be noted that errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, the demo start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the setting process required for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 17 described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. To do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least the variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how long the production time width should be used to display the above-determined production pattern (parts production), thereby constructing a production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is then executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical one of the above timers is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period) and within the variable period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (decorative symbol variable period). This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern appears on the axis with what time width and by what effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when a certain effect occurs, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created in the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. LED.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, the phrase, volume, etc. are based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various effect LEDs is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, the LED output process is executed (step S1011). In this LED output process, the LED data created by the LED drive data update process is output to the light display control unit, and the light emitting means such as the decorative lamp unit 45 and the effect LED is lit and blinked through the light display control unit. As a result, a light effect that matches the effect scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<17. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051) and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, when the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored and it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16 when displaying information related to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, or a menu item. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, a continuous hit, and the like.

Next, the effect update operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for the movable body accessory is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body production by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU) to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Contents of received command analysis processing: FIG. 18, FIG. 19>
18 and 19 show processes that are closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 of FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the cases where the "hold addition command" and the "decorative symbol specification command" are received will be described.

(Hold addition command reception process: FIG. 18)
In FIG. 18, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a winning command reception confirmation process (step S2201). When the effect control unit 24 receives the winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command, acquires the look-ahead determination result information (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information, and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The winning command reception process (not shown) to be stored is performed. Here, the reception confirmation processing is performed to confirm that the winning command is correctly received and the information is acquired. In the look-ahead information storage area. Similar to the hold storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side, a look-ahead information storage area corresponding to each of the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is provided. Further, these look-ahead information storage areas are operated. Hold 1 look-ahead information storage area to hold n look-ahead information storage area (n = 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of hold balls are provided, and each can store look-ahead determination result information for the maximum number of hold balls. It has become.

Next, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination result information is read-ahead prohibited (step S2203). When the read-ahead prohibition period is set (step S2203: YES), the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything.

If the look-ahead is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether or not the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate pre-reading notice effects. Specifically, when the operation hold ball is targeted for execution of the look-ahead notice effect by the look-ahead notice lottery in step S2205 described below, before the action hold ball is used for the symbol variation display game. , It is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being the execution target of the look-ahead effect. For the reason described above, the "continuous notice counter" stores the current value of the number of pending balls N (see step S2208 described later).

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited, and the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything. When the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step 2204: YES), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is permitted, and the look-ahead notice lottery process is performed (step S2205). This look-ahead effect lottery process performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform a look-ahead notice effect based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the fluctuation pattern that will be determined at the start of the fluctuation. It is a thing. The "winning command" and the "holding addition command" in the present embodiment are in the form of including information on each of the look-ahead variation pattern and the special symbol type. Therefore, this information is used for the look-ahead notice lottery.

There are two types of pre-reading notices according to this embodiment. One is mainly a pre-reading notice (pending change notice) of the winning time system that occurs when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, when the winning or the starting condition is satisfied). The other one is a look-ahead notice (pre-reading notice during change) of the symbol change middle system that occurs during the symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order. Therefore, the pre-reading notice lottery includes a lottery as to whether or not to give a pending change notice and a lottery as to whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuation, and both are performed independently here.

In the pre-reading effect lottery process, the pre-reading notice is drawn by using the pre-reading variation pattern information specified by the winning command and the pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is obtained. Based on the effect information (information about the look-ahead effect lottery result) is set (step 2206). This effect information is used when the pre-reading notice is displayed. The effect information set here includes (i) information for designating the hold change notice, for example, an effect scenario related to the hold change notice such as hold color and hold change timing specification information, and (ii) look-ahead notice during change. Information to be specified, for example, a production scenario related to a look-ahead notice during fluctuations such as a notice image type (thundercloud image, rain image, lightning bolt image) and execution count information, (iii) look-ahead production lottery non-winning (loss) information (look-ahead notice) Information that is not executed) is included. In the case of this example, since the lottery for whether or not to give a notice of pending change and the lottery for whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuation are independently performed, only the pending change notice is executed. , Only the variable look-ahead notice may be executed, or both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed, and both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed. Has a higher expectation of winning than when the look-ahead notice is executed alone.

When the effect control unit 24 executes the look-ahead notice of (i) and (ii), the hold change notice and / or change based on the effect information (effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice) based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery. The effect control process required for the middle notice is performed, and thereby, for example, the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 5B is realized. On the other hand, in the case of the above-mentioned (iii) pre-reading effect lottery non-winning, the pre-reading notice is not executed, and the white hold of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) is the corresponding hold display unit (a1 to d1 and a2 in FIG. 4). It will be displayed in ~ d2).

As a result of the pre-reading effect lottery process, when the pre-reading notice is executed, the value of the current number of pending balls is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). As a result, the look-ahead notice lottery for new operation-holding balls is prohibited for a certain period of time. It should be noted that this counter value is subtracted by 1 each time the old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the decorative symbol designation command reception process of FIG. 19 described later (step S2306 described later). reference). By setting the value of the number of active hold balls that exists when the pre-reading effect lottery is won as described above in the "continuous notice counter", a new operation hold is performed for the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Even if a ball is generated, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S2204: route of NO). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of held balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the look-ahead notice. The above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding the pre-reading notice winning. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not being won (pre-reading notice is not executed), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is being won (pre-reading notice is being executed). it can.

(Decorative pattern specification command reception process: Fig. 19)
With reference to FIG. 19, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes the variation pattern designation command reception confirmation process (step S2301). When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command, acquires fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern information at the start of fluctuation), and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The variable pattern specification command reception process (not shown) to be stored in is performed. Here, it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern specification command is correctly received and the information is acquired.

Next, the content of the decorative symbol designation command is analyzed, and symbol information regarding the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result) is acquired (step S2302).

Next, the production scenario type lottery is executed (step S2303). Here, based on the current production mode (or the current production stage if a production stage is provided) and the fluctuation pattern information, one of the multiple types of production scenarios is drawn for the production scenario during the current symbol change. Determined by. The production scenario includes various production scenarios related to the advance notice production executed during the current symbol change. When the production scenario is determined, the specific type of advance notice effect belonging to the determined advance notice effect type is further determined. For example, there are production scenarios A to C, production scenario A is a production scenario related to a step-up production type, production scenario B is a production scenario related to a player participation type production type, and production scenario C is related to a background change notice. In the case of a production scenario, it is assumed that the production scenario A is determined by the production scenario type lottery. Since this production scenario A is a production scenario related to the step-up effect type (for example, step-up effect C that ends in one stage, step-up effect B that develops to two stages, and step-up effect A that develops to the final stage). , Which of the step-up effects A to C belonging to the step-up effect type is to be executed is determined by a predetermined advance notice effect type lottery. In these step-up effects A to C, the lottery probability is determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the higher the expectation of winning, the easier it is for the step-up effect C, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, to be drawn. ing. Further, here, other effects (setting suggestion effect and non-notice effect) to be executed in association with the execution of the step-up effect are also determined.

Then, when a specific advance notice effect (here, any of step-up effects A to C) is determined, a variation pattern of the decorative pattern related to the current effect scenario is determined. The effect execution time of the step-up effects A to C is predetermined according to the content of the effect. For example, the step-up effect C for one stage is 9 seconds, and the step-up effect B for two stages is 10 seconds. The step-up effect A that develops to the final stage (3 stages) is set to 12 seconds. Therefore, when the step-up effect C (effect execution time is 9 seconds) is determined by this notice type lottery, the decorative pattern effect with a long stop operation is determined as the decorative pattern effect, and the step-up effect B (effect execution time is 9 seconds). When the effect execution time (10 seconds) is determined, the decorative symbol effect with the stop operation middle is determined as the decorative symbol effect, and when the step-up effect A (effect execution time is 12 seconds) is determined, As a decorative pattern effect, a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a short stop operation is determined. As a result, the decorative design effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 53 is realized. More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern this time is the normal fluctuation of 13s, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 46 is realized.

Regarding another example (FIGS. 47 to 53), if the variation pattern this time is the normal variation 16s, and the stop operation long is determined when the step-up effect A is determined, it is shown in FIG. 47. It is possible to realize such a decorative pattern production. Further, when the fluctuation pattern this time is the normal fluctuation 16s, the stop operation long or the stop operation middle can be selected when the step-up effect A is determined, and in the case of the normal fluctuation 13s, the stop operation short can be selected. For example, it is possible to realize a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 48. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the step-up effects A to C for the normal fluctuation 16s, the normal fluctuation 13s, and the normal fluctuation 4s, a decorative design effect as shown in FIGS. 49 to 50 can be realized. can do. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the effect stages A to C, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 51 can be realized. Further, when the variation pattern this time is the reach variation, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 can be realized according to the type of the effect to be executed and the current effect stage.

Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, a temporary stop symbol and a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol (combination of decorative symbol stop symbols) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery based on the effect scenario and the symbol information. For example, if the content of the fluctuation pattern is a hit fluctuation pattern specified by the reach effect and the winning type information is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the left symbol is first determined by lottery in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to the jackpot. Then, the decorative symbol that can form the reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and the decorative symbol sequence related to the 10R probability variation jackpot is finally stopped based on the determined left symbol and right symbol. Determine the middle design as follows. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 13s), the combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped is determined so that the lost stitch is stopped and displayed. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined, and a series of variable effects (preliminary effect scenario, decorative symbol effect scenario (decorative symbol variation pattern) to be executed during the current symbol variation are determined. Production scenario)) is decided. Then, the scenario data regarding the determined changing effect is set (step S2305).

Next, the continuous advance notice effect management process is executed (step S2306). Here, the effect processing related to the pre-reading notice during fluctuation is performed. For example, the effect processing required for executing the variable look-ahead notice is performed, such as subtraction of the continuous notice counter due to the execution of this game and display processing of the notice image related to the variable look-ahead notice.

Then, when the continuous advance notice effect management process of step S2306 is completed, various setting processes (step S2307) at the start of the decorative symbol variation are performed to exit the decorative symbol designation command reception process. After that, a decorative pattern variation display game based on the above-mentioned production scenario will be started.

The following configuration examples 1B to 8B can be summarized as preferable embodiments of the decorative symbol effect (decorative symbol stop operation pattern) described above.

[Configuration Example 1B]
(1) A symbol display that variablely displays a plurality of symbols (for example, a plurality of decorative symbols such as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol: FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state. Means (liquid crystal display device 36) and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means (effect control unit 24) capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined variation display of the predetermined variation time (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the normal variation 13s in FIG. 46),
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 45 (a). ), FIG. 46 (a)), or a second variation display in which the stop operation period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 45 (b), FIG. 46 (b)) may be executed,
The effect includes a first effect that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time, and a second effect that ends at a second end timing that is later than the first end timing (for example, FIG. 46). The difference between the end timing of production A and the end timing of production B),
When the first effect is executed, the first variation display is executed (FIG. 46 (a)).
When the second effect is executed, the second variation display is executed (FIG. 46 (b)).
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) In this configuration example 1, the first effect is terminated before at least the first stop symbol in the first variation display starts the stop operation (for example, the effect A shown in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
The second effect is characterized in that at least the first symbol to be stopped in the second variation display is terminated before the stop operation is started (for example, the effect B shown in FIG. 46 (b)).
(3) Further, in the above (1) or (2) of the configuration example 1, in the fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display in which the stop operation period is a third period longer than the second period (3) For example, the variable display for executing the stop operation long: FIGS. 45 (c) and 46 (c) may be executed, and neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed (for example, FIG. When the effect C of 46 is executed), the third variation display can be executed.

[Configuration Example 2B]
A symbol display means that fluctuates and displays a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 47 (c). ))When,
A second variation display (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 47 (b)), which is a second period in which the stop operation period is longer than the first period,
There is a third variation display (for example, a variation display for executing a long stop operation: FIG. 47 (a)), which is a third period in which the stop operation period is longer than the second period.
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the first fluctuation time, the first fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 13s, the stop operation short: FIG. 47 (c)).
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 16s, the stop operation is long: FIG. 47 (Fig. 47). a)), a game machine characterized by the above.

[Configuration Example 3B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means,
In a game machine equipped with
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 13s) and a second predetermined fluctuation display (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop is different depending on the effect to be executed. (For example, FIGS. 50A to 50C), and the variation display of any of the above is executed.
In the second predetermined variation display, of the plurality of types of variation display, the variation display of a smaller number of types than the number of types of the variation display in which the first predetermined variation display can be executed is executed (for example, FIG. 50 (d)). (E)), a gaming machine characterized by this.
(2) In the third configuration example 3, in the second predetermined variation display, one specific variation display can be executed among the plurality of types of variation displays in which the first predetermined variation display can be executed (for example). , Only the variable display accompanied by the stop operation short circuit is executed: FIG. 50 (d) :).

[Configuration Example 4B]
A symbol display means that fluctuates and displays a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time and a second predetermined fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop is different depending on the effect to be executed. Execute one of the variable display (for example, FIGS. 50A to 50C),
In the second predetermined variation display,
Of the fluctuation displays in which the first predetermined fluctuation display can be executed, fluctuation displays other than the fluctuation display of the longest stop operation period (for example, the fluctuation display of the stop operation (stop operation middle or stop operation short) other than the stop operation long). : A gaming machine characterized by executing FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (e).

[Configuration Example 5B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, at least one of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation, and then the plurality of symbols are used. One of a plurality of types of reach variation displays having different reach configuration operation periods until the reach state is configured is executed (for example, FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c)).
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 52 (a). ) To (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 5, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach of FIG. 52).

[Configuration Example 6B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means,
In a game machine equipped with
The effect executing means can execute an effect corresponding to an effect stage set from a plurality of types of effect stages (for example, effect stages A to C: FIGS. 51 and 53).
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect stage, the reach configuration operation period from when at least one of the plurality of symbols constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation to when the reach state by the plurality of symbols is configured is different. Execute one of the multiple types of reach variation display,
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 53 (a). ) To (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) In the configuration example 6, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach of FIG. 53).

[Configuration Example 7B]
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stop operation from the time when the first temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops.
The following relational expression (1) is satisfied when the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds) (for example, FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (c): Description of the relationship between the left stop operation period LMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
LMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 7, the symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed at the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, during the first stop operation, the second and subsequent temporarily stopped symbols are in the high-speed fluctuation display (for example, FIGS. 44 (a) and 45 (c): While the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol and the middle symbol are described during high-speed fluctuation).

[Configuration Example 8B]
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
The time during the first stop operation from the time when the second temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is defined as RMT (seconds).
When the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds), the following relational expression (1) is satisfied (for example, 44 (a), 45 (c): A description of the relationship between the right stop operation period RMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
RMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 8, the symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed at the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the symbol that is temporarily stopped last is in the high-speed fluctuation display during the second stop operation (for example, FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (c): right symbol. During the stop operation of, the middle symbol is described during high-speed fluctuation).

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all of the various configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are individual embodiments. It is not limited to only. For example, the configuration relating to the variation pattern selection technique according to the first embodiment and the configuration relating to the stop operation pattern technology according to the second embodiment can be appropriately combined.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a ball game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the ball game machine. For example, it may be an arrange ball machine or a sparrow ball game machine, and as other game media, a game machine using a game medal (rotary body type game machine) or a game medium using an electromagnetic recording means is used. It may be a managed game machine to be managed.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 and 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM.

Claims (1)

A lottery means to execute a lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit.
It is configured so that the time saving state can be controlled depending on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss.
The upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit is the same as the upper limit number of times controlled in the time saving state when the lottery result is lost.
A game machine characterized by that.